Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches with 2 SFP 1G & 2 SFP+ 10G Fiber Ports
Contents
1. Getting Started
2. Configure System Information
3. Configure Switching
4. Configuring Routing
5. Configure Quality of Service
- Manage Class of Service
- Manage Differentiated Services
6. Manage Device Security
7. Perform Maintenance Tasks
8. Manage Power over Ethernet
9. Monitor the System
A. Configuration Examples
B. Hardware Specifications and Default Values
- Switch Specifications
- Switch Features and Defaults

NETGEAR GC752X User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for GC752X by NETGEAR which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

NETGEAR GC752XP Manual

NETGEAR NETGEAR Manual

NETGEAR AGM731F Manual

NETGEAR ProSafe GS724TR Manual

NETGEAR GS608-300PES Manual

NETGEAR N600 Manual

NETGEAR GSM7248 Manual

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134

USA

August 2018

202-11864-03

Insight Managed 28-Port and

52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart

Cloud Switches with 2 SFP 1G &

2 SFP+ 10G Fiber Ports

Models GC728X, GC728XP

GC752X, GC752XP

User Manual

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Support

Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product. You can visit https://www.netgear.com/support/ to register your product,

get help, access the latest downloads and user manuals, and join our community. We recommend that you use only official

NETGEAR support resources.

Conformity

For the current EU Declaration of Conformity, visit http://kb.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621.

Compliance

For regulatory compliance information, visit http://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory/.

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

Do not use this device outdoors. If you connect cables or devices that are outdoors to this device, see

http://kb.netgear.com/000057103 for safety and warranty information.

Trademarks

used for reference purposes only.

Revision History

Publication Part

Number Publish Date Comments

202-11864-03 August 2018 Removed section on using the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to access the

switch and made other minor changes or corrections

202-11864-02 July 2018 Various editorial updates.

202-11864-01 May 2018 First publication

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Contents

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Switch Management Options and Default Management Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Available Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Interface Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Access the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Access the Switch On-Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Access the Switch Off-Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Change the Management Mode of the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Change the Management Mode to Direct Connect

Web-browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Change the Management Mode Back to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Register the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

How to Configure Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Local Browser Interface Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

View and Configure the Switch Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

View or Define System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

View the Switch CPU Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Configure the CPU Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and

Management VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

View the IPv6 Network Neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Configure the Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Configure Denial of Service Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Configure DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Configure Green Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Manage the Bonjour Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

View Bonjour Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Control the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Use the Device View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Configure Power over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

View the Supported MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Configure Authentication and Encryption for the SNMPv3 Admin Profile . 78

Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure LLDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Configure LLDP Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

View the LLDP-MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Configure the LLDP-MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

LLDP-MED Neighbors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

View Local LLDP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

View LLDP Neighbors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Configure DHCP L2 Relay and DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Configure a DHCP L2 Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Configure DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 3 Configure Switching

Configure Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Configure Link Aggregation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Configure LAG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Configure LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Set the LACP System Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Set the LACP Port Priority Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Configure VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Manage Basic VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Configure VLAN Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Configure VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

View the VLAN Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Configure Port PVID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Configure a Voice VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Configure Auto-VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Configure OUI-Based Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Manage the OUI Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Display the Auto-VoIP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Spanning Tree Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Configure STP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Configure CST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Configure CST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

View CST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

View Rapid STP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Manage MST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Configure MST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

View STP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Configure Multicast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

View or Clear the MFDB Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the MFDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Configure the Auto-Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Configure IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Configure MLD Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

View, Search, and Configure the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

View and Search the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Add a Static MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Remove a Static MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Configure Global Layer 2 Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection on a Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 4 Configuring Routing

How the Switch Handles Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Enable the Routing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

View the IP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Configure IPv6 Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Configure the IPv6 Global Routing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

View the IPv6 Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Manage IPv6 Prefixes for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

View IPv6 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

View the IPv6 Neighbor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Manage Static IPv6 Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

View the IPv6 Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Configure IPv6 Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Configure Routing VLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Configure VLAN Routing With the VLAN Routing Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Manually Manage Routing VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configure Router Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Configure Routes and View Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Delete Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Configure ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

View Entries in the ARP Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Create a Static ARP Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Configure the Global ARP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Remove ARP Entries From the ARP Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Chapter 5 Configure Quality of Service

Manage Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Overview of CoS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Configure Global CoS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Map DSCP Values to Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Manage Differentiated Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Overview of Defining DiffServ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Configure DiffServ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Configure the Global DiffServ Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Configure a DiffServ Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Configure DiffServ IPv6 Class Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Configure a DiffServ Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Configure the DiffServ Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

View DiffServ Service Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Chapter 6 Manage Device Security

Management Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Change the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Reset the Password to the Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

RADIUS Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Configure TACACS+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Configure Authentication Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Configure Management Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Configure HTTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

HTTPS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Manage Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Download Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Configure Access Rule Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Configure Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Configure Global 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Manage Port Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

View the Port Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

View the Client Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Set Up Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Manage MAC Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

View the MAC Filter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Configure Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Configure Port Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Configure Protected Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Configure a Private VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Configure Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Configure a Basic MAC ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Configure MAC ACL Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Configure MAC Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

View or Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Configure an IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Configure Rules for a Basic IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Configure an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Rules for an IPv6 ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Configure IP ACL Interface Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

View or Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Configure VLAN ACL Bindings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Chapter 7 Perform Maintenance Tasks

Reboot the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Export a File From the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Export a File to the TFTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Use an HTTP Sessions to Export a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Export a File to a USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Upgrade the Software or Download a File to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Upgrade the Software or Download a File to the Switch Using TFTP . . . . . 345

Upgrade the Software or Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP . . . . 347

Upgrade the Software or Download a File to the Switch Using

a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Manage Software Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Copy an Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Configure Dual Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

View the Dual Image Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Perform Troubleshooting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Send an IPv4 Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Send an IPv6 Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Send an IPv4 Traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Send an IPv6 Traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Enable Remote Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Configure Memory Dump Settings and Perform a Full Memory Dump . . . 360

Chapter 8 Manage Power over Ethernet

PoE Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Device Class Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Power Allocation and Power Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Configure the Global PoE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Manage and View the PoE+ Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Reset One or More PoE+ Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Create a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Specify the Settings for an Absolute PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Change the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . 375

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Chapter 9 Monitor the System

Monitor the Switch and the Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View or Clear the Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

View or Clear Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

View or Clear Detailed Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

View or Clear EAP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Perform a Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Configure and View Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Manage the Memory Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Message Log Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Manage the Flash Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Manage the Server Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

View or Clear the Trap Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

View or Clear the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Configure Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Appendix A Configuration Examples

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

VLAN Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Access Control Lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

MAC ACL Sample Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Standard IP ACL Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

DiffServ Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Creating Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

DiffServ Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

802.1X Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

MSTP Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Appendix B Hardware Specifications and Default Values

Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Switch Features and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

1. Getting Started

This manual describes how you can configure and monitor the following NETGEAR Insight

managed switches by using the local browser–based management interface (which is not the

default management mode):

•Model GC728X. Insight Managed 28-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2

SFP 1G & 2 SFP+ 10G Fiber Ports

•Model GC728XP. Insight Managed 28-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Cloud Switch

with 2 SFP 1G & 2 SFP+ 10G Fiber Ports

•Model GC752X. Insight Managed 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2

SFP 1G & 2 SFP+ 10G Fiber Ports

•Model GC752XP. Insight Managed 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Cloud Switch

with 2 SFP 1G & 2 SFP+ 10G Fiber Ports

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Switch Management Options and Default Management Mode

•Available Publications

•Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers

•User-Defined Fields

•Interface Naming Conventions

•Access the Switch

•Change the Management Mode of the Switch

•Register the Switch

•How to Configure Interface Settings

•Local Browser Interface Device View

In this manual, we refer to all switch models as the switch. Unless noted otherwise, all

information applies to all switch models.

For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the support website at

netgear.com/support.

Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are automatically made available through the

Insight app and, if selected, pushed straight from the cloud to the device. If you are not using the

Insight app to manage your device, you can manually download and install the latest firmware by

visiting downloadcenter.netgear.com. If the features or behavior of your product does not match

what is described in this manual, you might need to update your firmware.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Switch Management Options and Default Management

Mode

If you prefer, you can use the switch as a plug-and-play device, so you do not need to set up

a custom configuration. Just connect power, connect to your network and to your other

devices, and you’re done.

The switch is designed for management by the NETGEAR Insight app on a smartphone or

tablet. Alternatively, you can manage the switch from the Insight Cloud portal that is available

from a web browser on your Windows-based computer, Mac, or tablet. By default, the local

browser interface is disabled and you cannot use it while the switch is managed by the

NETGEAR Insight app or Insight Cloud portal.

The switch provides management options that let you discover the switch on the network and

configure, monitor, and control the switch:

•NETGEAR Insight app. Using the NETGEAR Insight app, you can discover the switch

on the network and add the switch to the NETGEAR Insight app so that you can set up

the switch in the network and manage and monitor the switch remotely from your

smartphone.You can choose from four methods to add the switch to the NETGEAR

Insight app: You can scan your network for the switch, scan the QR code or the barcode

of the switch, or add the serial number of the switch. For more information, visit

netgear.com/insight and see the NETGEAR knowledge base articles at

netgear.com/support.

•Insight Cloud portal. Using the NETGEAR Insight Cloud portal, you can set up the

switch in the network, perform advanced remote setup, configuration, and management,

monitor the switch, analyze the switch and network usage, and, if necessary, troubleshoot

the switch and the network.

•Local browser interface. By default, the management mode of the switch is set to

NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. With this setting you can manage

the switch using the Insight app or the Insight Cloud portal. For complex tasks such as

integrating with an existing network of devices that are not managed through Insight, and

for debugging purposes, you can change the management mode of the switch to Direct

Connect Web-browser Interface and access the local browser interface. In this mode, you

can change the settings of the specific device, but we recommend that you do not use

this mode to change settings that are Insight manageable because they would not be

synchronized with Insight or to the network location and other devices to which you

assigned the switch.

Note: Changes to Insight-manageable settings from the local browser

interface might also create conflicts with the rest of the

Insight-managed network to which the device is connected. While you

manage the switch with the local browser interface, you cannot use

the Insight app or Insight Cloud portal. To reenable management of

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

the device remotely or through the cloud, you can return the

management mode to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight

Cloud Portal at any time so that you can manage the switch with the

Insight app or Insight Cloud portal.

To use the local browser interface method, after you connect the switch to your network,

you must change the management method to Direct Connect Web-browser Interface

(see Change the Management Mode of the Switch on page 20).

Available Publications

The following guides are available at downloadcenter.netgear.com:

•Installation Guide

•Hardware Installation Guide

For information about the NETGEAR Insight app, visit netgear.com/insight and see the

NETGEAR knowledge base articles at netgear.com/support.

Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software

requirements:

•HTML version 4.0, or later

•HTTP version 1.1, or later

The following browsers were tested and support the local browser interface. Later browser

versions might function fine but were not tested. The following web browsers are supported:

•Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 11

•Microsoft Edge

•Mozilla Firefox version 59.0.3

•Chrome version 66.0

•Safari on Mac OS 8.0 versions 10.1.2

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

User-Defined Fields

In the local browser interface, user-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless

otherwise noted in the field label on the configuration page. All alphanumeric and special

characters can be used except for the following (unless specifically noted for that feature):

Interface Naming Conventions

The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and

the interface number. The physical ports include 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports for the GC728X

and GC728X models, and 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports for the GC752X and GC752XP models.

All of the models include two SFP 1G ports, and two SFP+ 10G ports. The ports are

numbered on the front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.

The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.

Table 1. Disallowed characters in user-defined fields

Character Definition Character Definition

\ Backslash < Less than

/ Forward slash > Greater than

* Asterisk | Pipe

? Question mark

Table 2. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface Description Example

Physical The physical ports include gigabit ports and are numbered

sequentially starting from 1 using the following format: gy.

g is for a 1G port and y is the port number.

The SFP+ 10G ports are prepended with an x.

g1, g2, g8

xg27

Link aggregation

group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are used only for bridging

functions. l1, l2, l4

CPU management

interface This is the internal switch interface responsible for the switch base

MAC address. This interface is not configurable and is always listed in

the MAC Address Table.

CPU

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Access the Switch

When you use the local browser interface, for easiest access, we recommend that you cable

the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on the

switch, and then use a computer that is connected to the same network as the switch

(on-network, see Access the Switch On-Network on page 13).

It is also possible to configure the switch connected directly only to the computer that you are

using to configure it, and not connected to the network (off-network, see Access the Switch

Off-Network on page 19).

Access the Switch On-Network

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default, allowing a DHCP server on the network

(or router that functions as a DHCP server) to assign an IP address to the switch.

If the switch is connected to a network, you can use one of the following methods to

determine the IP address of the switch and access the switch:

•Use a Windows-based computer. See Access the Switch On-Network from a

Windows-Based Computer on page 13.

•Use a Mac. See Access the Switch On-Network from a Mac Using Bonjour on page 14.

•Use the NETGEAR Insight app. See Determine the Switch IP Address Using the

NETGEAR Insight App and Access the Switch On-Network on page 17.

•Access the DHCP server . See Determine the Switch IP Address From the DHCP Server

and Access the Switch On-Network on page 15.

•Use an IP scanner utility. See Determine the Switch IP Address Through an IP Scanner

and Access the Switch On-Network on page 18.

Access the Switch On-Network from a Windows-Based Computer

To use a Windows-based computer and web browser to access the switch that is

connected to a network:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Open Windows Explorer.

5. Click the Network link.

6. If prompted, enable the Network Discovery feature.

7. Under Network Infrastructure, locate the switch model number.

The model number can be GC728X, GC728XP, GC752X, or GC752XP.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

8. Double-click GCmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) (where GCmodel is the model number of your

switch and xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx is the MAC address of the switch).

The login page of the local browser interface opens.

9. Enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

10. Click the Login button.

A notification displays.

11. Click the OK button to close the notification.

The System Information page displays. The IP address of the switch displays on the

System Information page.

12. Write down the IP address for future use.

13. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are

saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.

15. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

Access the Switch On-Network from a Mac Using Bonjour

If your Mac supports Bonjour, you can use the following procedure. If your Mac does not

support Bonjour, see Determine the Switch IP Address Using the NETGEAR Insight App and

Access the Switch On-Network on page 17.

To use a Mac and web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Open the Safari browser.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select Safari > Preferences.

The General page displays.

6. Click the Advanced tab.

The Advanced page displays.

7. Select the Include Bonjour in the Bookmarks Menu check box.

8. Close the Advanced page.

9. Select Bookmarks > Bonjour > GCmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) (where GCmodel is the

model number of your switch and xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx is the MAC address of the switch), or

Bookmarks > Bonjour > Webpages GCmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) depending on your

Mac OS version.

The login page of the local browser interface opens.

10. Enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

11. Click the Login button.

A notification displays.

12. Click the OK button to close the notification.

The System Information page displays. The IP address of the switch displays on the

System Information page.

13. Write down the IP address for future use.

14. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are

saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.

16. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

Determine the Switch IP Address From the DHCP Server and Access the

Switch On-Network

For information about how to access the DHCP server (or router that functions as a DHCP

server) in your network, see the documentation for your DHCP server (or router).

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To access the DHCP server and use a web browser to access the switch that is

connected to a network:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Access the DHCP server and view the IP address assigned to the switch.

5. Write down the IP address for future use.

6. Launch a web browser.

7. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

The login window opens.

8. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

9. Click the Login button.

A notification displays.

10. Click the OK button to close the notification.

The System Information page displays.

11. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are

saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.

13. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Determine the Switch IP Address Using the NETGEAR Insight App and Access

the Switch On-Network

To use the NETGEAR Insight app and a web browser to access the switch that is

connected to a network:

1. On your iOS or Android mobile device, go to the app store, search for NETGEAR

Insight, and download the app.

2. If the switch is directly connected to a WiFi router or access point, connect your mobile

device to the WiFi network of the router or access point.

3. Open the NETGEAR Insight app.

4. Select LOG IN to log in to your existing NETGEAR account or tap the CREATE NETGEAR

ACCOUNT button to create a new account.

5. After you log in to your account, name your network and specify a device admin password

that applies to all devices that you add to this network.

When you are done, tap the NEXT button.

6. You can now add the switch. Choose one of the following options:

•Tap Switch as the device type and follow the prompts to scan the network.

•Scan the QR code.

•Scan the serial number bar code.

•Type in the serial number.

Note: Screens might display and suggest that you connect the switch to

power and to an uplink. Since the switch is already connected to your

network, on these screens, tap the NEXT button.

7. If the switch is not yet connected to the same WiFi network as your mobile device, connect

it now to the same WiFi network, wait two minutes, and then tap the NEXT button.

The IP address of the switch displays in the device list.

8. Write down the IP address for future use.

9. Launch a web browser.

10. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

The login window opens.

11. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. Because you added the switch to a network on the

Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser

interface, enter your Insight network password.

12. Click the Login button.

A notification displays.

13. Click the OK button to close the notification.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

14. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are

saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.

16. When prompted, enter the password.

Because you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet

change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network

password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

Determine the Switch IP Address Through an IP Scanner and Access the

Switch On-Network

IP scanner utilities are available free of charge on the Internet.

To use an IP scanner utility and web browser to access the switch that is connected to

a network:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Using the IP scanner utility, scan your network for the IP address assigned to the switch.

5. Write down the IP address for future use.

6. Launch a web browser.

7. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

The login window opens.

8. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

9. Click the Login button.

A notification displays.

10. Click the OK button to close the notification.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

11. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are

saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.

13. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

Access the Switch Off-Network

The default IP address of the switch is 192.168.0.239. The IP address of the computer that

you use to access the switch off-network must in the same subnet as the default IP address

of the switch.

To use your web browser to configure a switch that is not connected to a network:

1. Record your computer’s TCP/IP configuration settings, and then configure the computer

with a static IP address of 192.168.0.210 and 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.

Note: If you are unsure how to do this, visit netgear.com/search-support.aspx

and search for the following:

How to set a static IP address in Windows

Setting a static IP address on your network adapter in Mac OS

2. Plug the switch into a power outlet and then connect your computer to the switch using an

Ethernet cable.

You can connect the Ethernet cable to any Ethernet port on the switch.

3. Open a web browser, and enter http://192.168.0.239.

This is the default address of the switch.

4. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

5. Click the Login button.

A notification displays.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. Click the OK button to close the notification.

The System Information page displays.

7. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are

saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.

9. When prompted, enter the password.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

10. After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used

for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.

You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.

Change the Management Mode of the Switch

By default, the management mode on the switch is NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight

Cloud Portal. With this setting you can manage the switch using the Insight app or the Insight

Cloud portal. The first time that you log in to the switch’s local browser interface, you must

change the management mode to Direct Connect Web-browser Interface (which is the same

as the local browser interface). You can also change the management mode back to

NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal, which also reenables supports for

the Insight Cloud portal.

Note the following about changing the management mode:

•Changing to Direct Connect Web-browser Interface. The NETGEAR Insight app

management mode becomes disabled and the current Insight-manageable device

settings are saved to the cloud server. Any changes that you make using the Direct

Connect Web-browser Interface management mode are not saved to the cloud server.

•Changing back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. If you

added the switch to a network on the Insight app before, all Insight-manageable device

settings are returned to the last configuration saved on the cloud server, including the

switch password (that is, the password is reset to the Insight network password).

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Change the Management Mode to Direct Connect

Web-browser Interface

Note: If you already accessed the local browser interface (see Access the

Switch on page 13), you can skip this section.

To change the management mode of the switch to Direct Connect Web-browser

Interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select the Direct Connect Web-browser Interface radio button.

6. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. The System Information page closes and the login window

displays again.

Any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server.

7. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now

available.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Change the Management Mode Back to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal

To change the management mode of the switch back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App

and Insight Cloud Portal:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal radio button.

6. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. The System Information page closes and the login page displays

again. (You can close the login page.)

The switch connects to the cloud server. If you added the switch to a network on the

Insight app before, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last

configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the

password is reset to the Insight network password)

To qualify for product updates and product warranty, we encourage you to register your

product. The first time you log in to the switch, you are given the option of registering with

NETGEAR. Registration confirms that your email alerts work, lowers technical support

resolution time, and ensures that your shipping address accuracy. We would also like to

incorporate your feedback into future product development. We never sell or rent your email

address and you can opt out of communications at any time.

If you use the Insight app, after the app discovers the switch and you add it to a network

using the NETGEAR Insight app, the switch is automatically registered to your MyNETGEAR

account. This registration process is also referred to as claiming. For information about the

NETGEAR Insight app, see the NETGEAR knowledge base articles at netgear.com/support.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

If you do not claim (register) the device and add it to an Insight network using the Insight app,

you can manually register the switch using the local browser interface as described in the

following procedure or you can visit the NETGEAR website for registration at

my.netgear.com.

To register the switch through the local browser interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

5. Select Help > Registration.

The Product Registration page displays.

6. Click the Register button.

A NETGEAR web page opens.

7. Follow the prompts online.

How to Configure Interface Settings

For some features you can apply the same settings simultaneously to any of the following:

•A single port

•Multiple ports

•All ports

•A single LAG

•Multiple LAGs

•All LAGs

•Multiple ports and LAGs

•All ports and LAGs

Many of the pages that allow you to configure or view interface settings include links to

display all ports, all LAGs, or all ports and LAGs on the page.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Use these links as follows:

•To display all ports, click the 1 link. The LAGs are not displayed.

•To display all LAGs, click the LAGS link. The ports are not displayed.

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

The procedures in this section describe how to select the ports and LAGs to configure. The

procedures assume that you are already logged in to the switch. If you do not know how to

To configure a single port or LAG:

1. Click the All link to display the all ports and LAGs.

2. Do one of the following:

a. In the Go To Interface field, type the port number and click the Go button.

For example, type g4 for a port or type l3 for a LAG. For more information, see

Interface Naming Conventions on page 12.

The check box for the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface is

highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.

b. Select the check box for the port or LAG.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number displays in

the heading row.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each port and LAG to configure.

The row for each selected interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check boxes for all ports and LAGs are selected and the rows for all ports and LAGs

are highlighted.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Local Browser Interface Device View

The Device View page displays the ports on the switch. This graphic provides an alternate

way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic also provides

information about device ports, current configuration and status, tables, and feature

components.

To use the Device View:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Device View.

The previous figure shows the Device View page for model GC728XP.

The port color indicates the port status:

•Green. The port is linking up.

•Red. An error occurred on the port or the port is administratively disabled.

•Black. No link is present.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The left port LED indicates the connection, speed, and traffic status:

•Solid gray. The port is not connected. This is the default state.

•Solid green. The port is operating at its maximum speed.

•Blinking green. The port is transmitting or receiving traffic at its maximum speed

•Solid amber The port is operating at below its maximum speed.

•Blinking amber. The port is transmitting or receiving traffic below its maximum

speed.

The right port LED indicates the PoE status (this does not apply to models GC728X and

GC752X):

•Off. The port is not delivering PoE power.

•Solid green. The port is delivering PoE power.

•Solid amber. A PoE fault occurred.

The system LEDs indicate the following status:

•Cloud LED:

-Solid blue. The switch is connected to the cloud server and is set up to be

managed by the NETGEAR Insight app.

-Off. The switch is not connected to the cloud server or is set up to be managed by

the local browser interface.

•PoE Max LED (this does not apply to models GC728X and GC752X):

-Off. Sufficient (more than 7W of) PoE power is available.

-Solid amber. Less than 7W of PoE power is available.

-Blinking amber. At least once during the previous two minutes, less than 7W of

PoE power was available.

•Fan LED:

-Solid green. The fan is operating normally.

-Solid amber. A problem occurred with the fan.

6. To see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options, click a port.

Getting Started

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The previous figure shows the Device View page for model GC728XP.

7. To display the main menu that contains the same options as the navigation menu at the top

of the page, right-click the graphic without clicking a specific port.

The previous figure shows the Device View page for model GC728XP.

2. Configure System Information

This chapter covers the following topics:

•View and Configure the Switch Management Settings

•Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour Information

•Control the LEDs

•Use the Device View

•Configure Power over Ethernet

•Configure SNMP

•Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol

•Configure DHCP L2 Relay and DHCP Snooping

•Set Up PoE Timer Schedules

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View and Configure the Switch Management Settings

This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch

information, such as the management interface IP address, system clock settings, and DNS

information. The following sections describe how you can configure the switch management

settings:

•View or Define System Information on page 29

•View the Switch CPU Status on page 34

•Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and Management VLAN on

page 37

•Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface on page 38

•View the IPv6 Network Neighbor on page 40

•Configure the Time Settings on page 41

•Configure Denial of Service Settings on page 55

•Configure DNS Settings on page 57

•Configure Green Ethernet Settings on page 61

View or Define System Information

When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general

device information.

To view or define system information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Define the following fields:

•System Name. Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters.

•System Location. Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters.

•System Contact. Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters.

6. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the status information that the System Information page

displays.

Table 3. System Information

Field Description

Product Name The product name of this switch.

Serial Number The serial number of the switch.

Date & Time The current date and time.

System Up Time The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.

Base Mac Address Universally assigned hardware address of the switch.

Temp (C) The general temperature of the switch in degrees Centigrade.

Temperature traps range Identifies the minimum and maximum traps range.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the Temperature Sensor Information

You can view the current temperature of the temperature sensors. The temperature is instant

and can be updated with the latest information about the switch when you click the Refresh

button. The maximum temperature of the temperature sensors depends on the actual

hardware.

To view temperature information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Scroll down to the Temperature Sensors section.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Temperature Sensors information.

Table 4. Temperature Sensors information

Field Description

Sensor The temperature sensor for the switch

Description The description of the temperature sensor.

Temp(C) The temperature of the switch in degrees Centigrade.

State The switch temperature state.

Max Temp (C) The maximum temperature value of CPU. If the switch exceeds this limit, it

shuts down.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the Fan Status

You can view the status of the fans. These fans remove the heat generated by the power,

CPU, and other components, and allow the switch to function normally.

To view the fan status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Scroll down to the Fans section.

The fan information displays.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fan status information.

Table 5. Fan status

Field Description

FAN The fan index used to identify the fan for the switch. (The index is 1.)

Description The description of the temperature sensor.

Type Specifies whether the fan module is fixed or removable.

Speed The fan speed.

Duty level(%) The duty level of the fan.

State Specifies whether the fan is operational.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the Power Supplies

You can view s the status of the power supplies.

To view the power supplies status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Scroll down to the Power supplies section.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Power supplies information.

Table 6. Power supplies status

Field Description

Power supply The power supply index used for the switch.

Description The description of the power supply.

Type Specifies whether the power module is fixed or removable.

State Specifies the state of the power module.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the Software Versions

You can view the software versions that are running on the switch.

To view the software versions:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Scroll down to the Versions section.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Versions

section of the System Information page.

View the Switch CPU Status

You can monitor the CPU, memory resources, and utilization patterns across various

intervals to assess the performance, load, and stability parameters of the switch.

To view the switch CPU status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Table 7. Versions information

Field Description

Model Name The model name of the switch.

Boot Version The version of the bootloader software of the switch.

Software Version The version number of the code currently running on the switch.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is

off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > System CPU Status.

The CPU Utilization section shows the memory information, task-related information, and

percentage of CPU utilization per task.

The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.

Table 8. CPU Memory Status information

Field Description

Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes.

Available Memory The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure the CPU Thresholds

The CPU utilization threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that,

when exceeded, trigger a notification. The notification occurs through SNMP trap and syslog

messages.

To configure the CPU thresholds:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold.

The CPU Threshold page displays.

6. Specify the thresholds:

•Rising Threshold. Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds

this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.

•Rising Interval. This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to

86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

•Falling Threshold. Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below

this level for a configured period of time.

The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold

value. The falling utilization threshold notification is sent only if a rising threshold

notification was sent previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time

period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization parameters are not configured, the

parameters automatically get the same values as the Rising CPU utilization

parameters. The range is 1 to 100.

•Falling Interval. The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5

seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

•Free Memory Threshold. The free memory threshold value for the CPU in KB.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and

Management VLAN

You can configure network information for the network interface, which is the logical interface

used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s ports. You also use

the IPv4 address of the network interface to connect to the switch through the local browser

interface. The configuration parameters that is associated with the switch’ s network interface

do not affect the configuration of the ports through which traffic is switched.

To configure the IPv4 address for the network interface and the management VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

6. Select a radio button to specify how the network information for the switch management

interface must be configured:

•Static IP Address. Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio

button.

•Dynamic IP Address (BOOTP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a BootP server.

•Dynamic IP Address. Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address through a

DHCP server. This is the default setting. By default, the DHCP client is enabled.

7. If you select the Static IP Address radio button, configure the following network information:

•IP Address. The IP address of the network interface. The default is 192.168.0.239.

Each part of the IP address must start with a number other than zero. For example, IP

addresses 001.100.192.6 and 192.001.10.3 are not valid.

•Subnet Mask. The IP subnet mask for the interface. The default value is

255.255.255.0.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Default Gateway. The default gateway for the IP interface. The default value is

192.168.0.254.

8. Specify the VLAN ID for the management VLAN.

The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a

computer that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active

management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established

through any port.

When the management VLAN is set to a different value, an IP connection can be made

only through a port that is part of the management VLAN. Also, the port VLAN ID (PVID)

of the port to be connected in that management VLAN must be the same as the

management VLAN ID.

Note: Make sure that the VLAN that you want to assign as the management

VLAN exists. Also make sure that the PVID of at least one port in the

VLAN is the same as the management VLAN ID. For information

about creating VLANs and configuring the PVID for a port, see

Configure VLANs on page 112.

The following requirements apply to the management VLAN:

•Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.

•When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing

management VLAN is lost.

•The management station must be reconnected to the port in the new management

VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface

You can configure the IPv6 address for the network interface, which is the logical interface

used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel ports.

You also use the IPv6 address of the network interface to connect to the switch through the

local browser interface. The configuration parameters that is associated with the switch’s

network interface do not affect the configuration of the ports through which traffic is switched.

To access the switch over an IPv6 network, you must initially configure the switch with IPv6

information (IPv6 prefix, prefix length, and default gateway). IPv6 can be configured using

any of the following options:

•IPv6 auto-configuration

•DHCPv6

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

When in-band connectivity is established, you can change the IPv6 information through the

local browser interface.

To configure the IPv6 address for the network interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Configuration.

The IPv6 Network Global Configuration page displays.

6. Ensure that the Admin Mode Enable radio button is selected.

7. Determine how the switch acquires an IPv6 address:

•IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode. When this mode is enabled, the network

interface can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol

(NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages. When this mode is

disabled, the network interface does not use the native IPv6 address

autoconfiguration feature to acquire an IPv6 address. Autoconfiguration can be

enabled only when DHCPv6 is not enabled on any of the management interfaces.

•DHCPv6. Next to Current Network Configuration Protocol, select the DHCPv6 radio

button to enable the DHCPv6 client on the interface. The switch attempts to acquire

network information from a DHCPv6 server. Selecting the None radio button disables

the DHCPv6 client on the network interface. When DHCPv6 is enabled, the DHCPv6

Client DUID field displays the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client (if enabled)

when sending messages to the DHCPv6 server.

8. In the IPv6 Gateway field, specify the IPv6 address for the default gateway for the network

interface.

The gateway address is in IPv6 global or link-local address format.

9. To configure one or more static IPv6 addresses for the network interface, do the following:

a. In the IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length field, specify the static IPv6 prefix and prefix to the

IPv6 network interface.

The address is in the global address format.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

b. In the EUI64 menu, select True to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI)

flag for IPv6 address, or select False to omit the EUI flag.

c. Click the Add button.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IPv6 Network Neighbor

You can view information about the IPv6 neighbors that the switch discovers through the

Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP).

To view the IPv6 neighbor table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Neighbor.

The IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table page displays.

The following table describes the information the IPv6 Network Neighbor page displays about

each IPv6 neighbor that the switch discovered.

Table 9. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information

Field Description

IPv6 address The IPv6 address of a neighbor switch visible to the network interface.

MAC address The MAC address of a neighbor switch.

IsRtr • true (1). The neighbor machine is a router.

• false (2). The neighbor machine is not a router.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure the Time Settings

The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a

less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the

clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the

Internet. You can also set the system time manually.

Configure the Time Setting Manually

You can view and adjust date and time settings.

To manually configure the time setting:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Clock Source Local radio button.

7. In the Date field, specify the current date in months, days, and years (MM/DD/YYYY).

8. In the Time field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds (HH:MM:SS).

Neighbor State The state of the neighboring switch:

• reachable (1). The neighbor is reachable from the switch.

• stale (2). Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion.

• delay (3). No information was received from the neighbor during

the delay period.

• probe (4). The switch is attempting to probe the neighbor.

• unknown (5). Unknown status.

Last Updated The last time that the neighbor information was updated.

Table 9. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Note: If you do not enter a date and time, the switch calculates the date and

time using the CPU’s clock cycle.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Time Settings With SNTP

To configure the time by using SNTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Clock Source SNTP radio button.

The page refreshes and displays the SNTP Global Configuration section and the SNTP

Global Status section.

The default is SNTP. The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two

conditions are met:

•The SNTP server is configured.

•The SNTP last attempt status is successful.

7. Next to Client Mode, select the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

•Disable. SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client nor are

any incoming SNTP messages processed.

•Unicast. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request

to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can

determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative

to the server.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Broadcast. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local

broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a

single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.

The default value is Disable.

8. If the SNTP client mode is Unicast, use the SNTP Server Configuration page to add the IP

address or DNS name of one or more SNTP servers for the switch to poll.

For more information, see Configure an SNTP Server on page 47.

9. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and 123. The default value is 123. When the default

value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the

operating system.

10. In the Unicast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2. to The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

11. In the Broadcast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2.

Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is

6 to 10. The default value is 6.

12. In the Unicast Poll Timeout field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP

response to a unicast poll request.

The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

13. In the Unicast Poll Retry field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to

an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured

server.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

14. In the Time Zone Name field, specify a time zone.

You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone is

different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the

display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

Note: When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the

time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the

same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time

zone in which the switch is located.

15. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from

UTC.

See the description for Time Zone Name in Step 14 for more information. The allowed

range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

16. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different

from UTC.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

See the description for Time Zone Name in Step 14 for more information. The allowed

range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

17. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the Global SNTP Settings

To modify the global SNTP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

If the clock source is SNTP, the SNTP Global Configuration section displays below the

Time Configuration section.

6. Select a Client mode radio button to specify the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

•Disable. SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client and no

received SNTP messages are processed.

•Unicast. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request

to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can

determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative

to the server.

•Broadcast. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local

broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a

single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.

The default value is Unicast.

7. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and the value 123. The default value is 123. When

the default value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is

assigned by the operating system.

8. In the Unicast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2.

The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

9. In the Broadcast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2.

Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is

6 to 10. The default value is 6.

10. In the Unicast Poll Timeout field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP

response to a unicast poll request.

The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

11. In the Unicast Poll Retry field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to

an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured

server.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

12. In the Time Zone Name field, specify a time zone.

You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone is

different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the

display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

Note: When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the

time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the

same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time

zone in which the switch is located.

13. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from

UTC.

The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

14. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different

from UTC.

The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

16. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View SNTP Global Status

When you select the SNTP option as the clock source, the SNTP global status is displayed

below the SNTP Global Configuration section of the page. The SNTP Global Status table

displays information about the system’s SNTP client.

To view SNTP global status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

If the clock source is SNTP, the SNTP Global Status section displays below the SNTP

Global Configuration section.

6. Click the Refresh button to update the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 10. SNTP Global Status information

Field Description

Version The SNTP version that the client supports.

Supported mode The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by

a client.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system

clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an

unsolicited message.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure an SNTP Server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch operates only as

an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by strata. Strata define the accuracy of the reference clock.

The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device

receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast

and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of

Other is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

• Other. The status of the last request is unknown.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was

updated.

• Request Timed Out. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server,

the response timer expired before a response from the server was

received.

• Bad Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its

peers. This is indicated by the leap indicator field in the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries

were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to

0 in a message received from a server.

Server IP Address The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message

was received from any server, an empty string is shown.

Address Type The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid

packet.

Server Stratum The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Reference Clock ID The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server mode The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

Unicast Server Max Entries The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this

client.

Unicast Server Current Entries The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.

Broadcast Count The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and

processed by the SNTP client since the last reboot.

Table 10. SNTP Global Status information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following is an example of strata:

•Stratum 0. A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

•Stratum 1. A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1

time servers provide primary network time standards.

•Stratum 2. The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from

a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server

type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

•T1. Time that the original request was sent by the client.

•T2. Time that the original request was received by the server.

•T3. Time that the server sent a reply.

•T4. Time that the client received the server's reply.

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for

synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the

preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this

method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the

device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or

at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network T ime Protocol

SNTP servers.

Add an SNTP Server

To add an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. From the Server Type menu, select the type of SNTP address to enter in the address field.

The address can be either an IP address (IPv4, IPv6) or a host name (DNS). The default

value is IPv4.

7. In the Address field, specify the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or

host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this

address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each

time an SNTP request is sent to it.

8. If the UDP port on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent is not the standard

port (123), specify the port number in the Port field.

The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

9. In Priority field, specify the priority order which to query the servers.

The SNTP client on the device continues sending SNTP requests to different servers until

a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the

order in which to query the servers. The request is sent to an SNTP server with a priority

value of 1 first, then to a server with a priority value of 2, and so on. If any servers are

assigned the same priority, the SNTP client contacts the servers in the order that they

appear in the table. The valid range is 1 to 3. The default value is 1.

10. In the Version field, specify the NTP version running on the server.

The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.

11. Click the Add button.

The SNTP server entry is added.

12. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to three SNTP servers.

The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers

configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Server Global Status

information.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Change the Settings for an Existing SNTP Server

To change the settings for an existing SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

Table 11. SNTP Server Status information

Field Description

Address All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message stating

that no SNTP server exists displays on the page.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the response from the server was used to update the

system clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP server was last queried.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and

broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is

displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes:

• Other. The status of the last request is unknown, or no SNTP responses were

received.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the

response timer expired before a response from the server was received.

• Bad Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This

is indicated by the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to

be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message

received from a server.

Requests The number of SNTP requests made to the server since the last reboot.

Failed Requests The number of failed SNTP requests made to the server since the last reboot.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the configured server.

7. Specify new values in the available fields.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an SNTP Server

To remove an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the configured server to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings

You can configure settings for summer time, which is also known as daylight saving time.

Used in some countries around the world, summer time is the practice of temporarily

advancing clocks during the summer months. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one or

more hours near the start of spring and are adjusted backward in autumn.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To configure the daylight saving time settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

The DayLight Saving (DST) Configuration page displays.

6. Select a Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

•Disable. Disable daylight saving time.

•Recurring. Daylight saving time occurs at the same time every year. The start and

end times and dates for the time shift must be manually configured.

•Recurring EU. The system clock uses the standard recurring summer time settings

used in countries in the European Union. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

•Recurring USA. The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time

settings used in the United States. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

•Non Recurring. Daylight saving time settings are in effect only between the start date

and end date of the specified year. When this option is selected, the summer time

settings do not repeat on an annual basis.

7. Configure the settings for the selected daylight saving method by doing the following:

•If you select the DayLight Saving (DST) Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring

USA radio button, configure the settings that are shown in the following table.

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week. Configure the start week.

• Day. Configure the start day.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•If you select the DayLight Saving (DST) Non Recurring radio button, configure the

settings that are shown in the following table.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the DayLight Saving Time Status

The Daylight Saving (DST) Status section shows information about the summer time settings

and whether the time shift for summer time is currently in effect.

To view the daylight saving time status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week. Configure the end week.

• Day. Configure the end day.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hour.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Offset Configure recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.

Zone Configure the time zone.

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Date. Configure the start date.

• Year. Configure the start year.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Date. Configure the end date.

• Year. Configure the end year.

• Hours. Configure the end hour.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Offset Specify the number of minutes to shift the summer time from the standard time. The

valid range is 1–1440 minutes.

Zone Specify the acronym associated with the time zone when summer time is in effect.

This field is not validated against an official list of time zone acronyms.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

The DayLight Saving (DST) Configuration page displays.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable daylight saving status information.

Table 12. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information

Field Description

Daylight Saving (DST) The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Non Recurring

Begins At The start date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Ends At The end date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Offset (in Minutes) The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight

saving time is disabled.

Zone The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving

time is disabled.

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect Indicates whether daylight saving time is in effect.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Denial of Service Settings

You can configure the Denial of Service (DoS) settings for the switch. The switch provides

support for classifying and blocking specific types of DoS attacks.

Configure Auto-DoS

You can automatically enable all the DoS features available on the switch, except for the L4

Port attack. For information about the types of DoS attacks the switch can monitor and block,

see Configure Denial of Service on page 56.

To enable the Auto-DoS feature:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Auto-DoS Configuration.

The Auto-DoS Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Auto-DoS Mode Enable radio button.

When an attack is detected, a warning message is logged to the buffered log and is sent

to the syslog server. At the same time, the port is shut down and can be enabled only

manually by the admin user.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Denial of Service

The Denial of Service Configuration page allows you to select which types of DoS attacks the

switch monitors and blocks.

To configure individual DoS settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Denial of Service Configuration.

The Denial of Service Configuration page displays.

6. Select the types of DoS attacks for the switch to monitor and block and configure any

associated values:

•Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size. Specify the minimum TCP header size

allowed. If DoS TCP Fragment is enabled, the switch drops packets with a TCP

header smaller than the configured value.

•Denial of Service ICMPv4. Enabling ICMPv4 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv4 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than

the configured ICMPv4 packet size.

•Denial of Service Max ICMPv4 Packet Size. Specify the maximum ICMPv4 packet

size allowed. If ICMPv4 DoS prevention is enabled, the switch drops IPv4 ICMP ping

packets with a size greater than the configured value.

•Denial of Service ICMPv6. Enabling ICMPv6 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv6 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than

the configured ICMPv6 packet size.

•Denial of Service Max ICMPv6 Packet Size. Specify the maximum IPv6 ICMP

packet size allowed. If ICMPv6 DoS prevention is enabled, the switch drops IPv6

ICMP ping packets with a size greater than the configured maximum ICMPv6 packet

size.

•Denial of Service First Fragment. Enabling First Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to check DoS options on first fragment IP packets when the switch receives

fragmented IP packets. Otherwise, the switch ignores the first fragment IP packages.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Denial of Service ICMP Fragment. Enabling ICMP Fragment DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop ICMP fragmented packets.

•Denial of Service SIP=DIP. Enabling SIP=DIP DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets with a source IP address equal to the destination IP address.

•Denial of Service SMAC=DMAC. Enabling SMAC=DMAC DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a source MAC address equal to the destination MAC

address.

•Denial of Service TCP FIN&URG&PSH. Enabling TCP FIN & URG & PSH DoS

prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set

and TCP sequence number equal to 0.

•Denial of Service TCP Flag&Sequence. Enabling TCP Flag DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with TCP control flags set to 0 and TCP sequence number

set to 0.

•Denial of Service TCP Fragment. Enabling TCP Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a TCP payload for which the IP payload length minus

the IP header size is less than the minimum allowed TCP header size.

•Denial of Service TCP Offset. Enabling TCP Offset DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop packets with a TCP header offset set to 1.

•Denial of Service TCP Port. Enabling TCP Port DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets for which the TCP source port is equal to the TCP destination port.

•Denial of Service TCP SYN. Enabling TCP SYN DoS prevention causes the switch

to drop packets with TCP flags SYN set.

•Denial of Service TCP SYN&FIN. Enabling TCP SYN & FIN DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN and FIN set.

•Denial of Service UDP Port. Enabling UDP Port DoS prevention causes the switch

to drop packets for which the UDP source port is equal to the UDP destination port.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DNS Settings

You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch

operates as a DNS client.

Configure Global DNS Settings

You can configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.

To configure the global DNS settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

The DNS Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Disable or Enable radio button to specify whether to disable or enable the

administrative status of the DNS client.

•Enable. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS

domain name. The DNS is enabled by default.

•Disable. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.

7. In the DNS Default Name field, enter the default DNS domain name to include in DNS

queries.

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is

provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the

user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear .com to resolve the name). The name

must not be longer than 255 characters.

8. In the DNS Server field, specify the IPv4 address to which the switch sends DNS queries.

9. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The Preference

field displays the server preference order. The preference is set in the order in which

preferences were entered.

10. To remove a DNS server from the list, select its check box and click the Delete button.

If you click the Delete button without selecting a DNS server, all the DNS servers are

deleted.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Configure and View Host Name-to-IP Address Information

You can manually map host names to IP addresses or view dynamic host mappings.

Add a Static Entry to the Dynamic Host Mapping Table

To add a static entry to the local dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The Host Configuration page displays.

6. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a required field.

7. In the IPv4/IPv6 Address field, enter the IP address to associate with the host name.

8. Click the Add button.

The entry displays in the list on the page.

Table 13. DNS Server Configuration information

Field Description

ID The identification of the DNS Server.

Preference Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preferences are

determined by the order in which they were entered.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Remove an Entry From the Dynamic Host Mapping Table

To remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the entry to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

Change the Host Name or IP Address in an Entry of the Dynamic Host Mapping Table and

View All Entries

To change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping table

and view all entries:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page display.

6. Select the check box next to the entry to update.

7. Enter the new information in the appropriate field.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the Clear button.

The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch

learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Configure Green Ethernet Settings

You can configure the green Ethernet features to reduce power consumption.

To configure the Green Ethernet settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration.

Table 14. Dynamic Host Mapping information

Field Description

Host Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Total Time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.

Elapsed Time since the dynamic entry was last updated.

Type The type of the dynamic entry.

IPv4/IPv6 Address Lists the IP address that is associated with the host name.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The Green Ethernet Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Auto Power Down Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. When a port link is down, the underlying physical layer

goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so that

autonegotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link

partner is present for the port.

7. Select the EEE Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with

a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by the

IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of

the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to

low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or

corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to

upper layer protocols and applications.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings

You can configure per-port Green Ethernet settings.

To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration.

The Green Ethernet Interface Configuration page displays.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. Do one of the following:

•In the Go To Interface field, enter the port using the respective naming convention

(for example, g1 or l1), and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

For more information about naming conventions, see Interface Naming Conventions

on page 12.

•Select the port.

7. Select the Auto Power Down Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. When a port link is down, the underlying physical layer

goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so that

autonegotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link

partner is present for the port.

8. Select the EEE Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC

with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined

by the IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive

sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded.

Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not

dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is

transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices

You can view detailed per-port green Ethernet information and enable or disable green

Ethernet settings on a single port. Using the green Ethernet features allows for power

consumption savings.

To configure green Ethernet local and remote devices:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Details.

The Green Ethernet Details page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

7. From the EEE Admin mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

With the EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during a link idle

condition. The default value is Disabled. If the EEE Admin Mode is not supported, N/A is

displayed.

8. In the EEE Transmit Idle Time field, enter the time after which switch transitions to the LPI

state.

The range is 600 to 4294967295. The default value is 600.

9. In the EEE Transmit Wake Time field, enter the time that the switch must wait before it

transitions to the active state after it receives a packet for transmission.

The range is 8 to 65535. The default value is 17.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

12. To clear the configuration, resetting all statistics for the selected interface to default values,

click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 15. Green Ethernet Local Device Information

Field Description

Cumulative Energy Saved on this

port due to Green mode(s) (Watts

* Hours)

Cumulative energy saved due to all green modes enabled on this port in

watts * hours.

Rx Low Power Idle Event Count This field is incremented each time MAC RX enters low-power idle (LPI)

state. Shows the total number of Rx LPI events since EEE counters were

last cleared.

Rx Low Power Idle Duration

(uSec) This field indicates duration of Rx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the

total duration of Rx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.

Tx Low Power Idle Event Count This field is incremented each time MAC TX enters LPI state. Shows the

total number of Tx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.

Tx Low Power Idle Duration

(uSec) This field indicates duration of Tx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the

total duration of Tx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View Green Ethernet Remote Device Details

To view green Ethernet remote device information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

Tw_sys_tx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system can

support.

Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the remote system’s Transmit Tw_sys that was used

by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it wants to request from the

remote system.

Tw_sys_rx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system requests

from the remote system.

Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the remote system’s Receive Tw_sys that was used

by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it can support.

Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the local system

requests from the remote system.

Tx_dll_enabled Data Link Layer Enabled: Initialization status of the EEE transmit Data Link

Layer management function on the local system.

Tx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the tx system

initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing

EEE TLV.

Rx_dll_enabled Status of the EEE capability negotiation on the local system.

Rx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the rx system

initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing

EEE TLV.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time Since Counters Last Cleared (since the time of power-up, or after

EEE counters are cleared).

Table 15. Green Ethernet Local Device Information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet >Green Ethernet Details.

The Green Ethernet Details page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Remote Device Information section.

7. Select the interface.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary

This page summarizes the green Ethernet settings currently in use.

To view the green Ethernet statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

Table 16. Green Ethernet Remote Device Information

Field Description

Remote ID The remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_tx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system can

support.

Remote Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Transmit Tw_sys echoed back by the

remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system

requests from the local system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Receive Tw_sys echoed back by the

remote system.

Remote Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the remote

system is advertising.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Summary.

The Green Ethernet Statistics Summary page displays.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History

You can configure and view the Green Ethernet low power idle (LPI) history.

To configure the port Green Ethernet EEE LPI history:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

Table 17. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary information

Field Description

Current Power Consumption (mW) Estimated power consumption by all ports of the switch in mWatts.

Percentage Power Saving (%) Estimated percentage of power saved on all ports of the switch if the green

modes are enabled.

Cumulative Energy Saving (W * H) Estimated cumulative energy saved on the switch in watts multiplied by

hours if all green modes are enabled.

Unit The unit ID.

Green Features supported on this

unit List of green features supported on the given unit, which could be one or

more of the following: Energy-Detect (Energy Detect), Short-Reach (Short

Reach), EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet), LPI-History (EEE Low Power Idle

History), LLDP-Cap-Exchg (EEE LLDP Capability Exchange), Pwr-Usg-Est

(Power Usage Estimates).

Interface Interface for which data is displayed or configured.

Energy Detect Admin mode Enable or disable Energy Detect mode on the port. When this mode is

enabled, when the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a

short period of time, then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the

switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no

link partner is present.

Energy Detect Operational Status Current operational status of the Energy Detect mode.

EEE Admin mode Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. With EEE

mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during link idle

conditions.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet LPI History.

The Green Ethernet LPI History page displays.

6. Select the interface.

7. In the Sampling Interval field, enter the interval at which EEE LPI data is collected.

This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 30 to 36000.The

default value is 3600.

8. In the Max Samples to keep field, enter the maximum number of samples to keep.

This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 1 to 168.The default

value is 168.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Percentage LPI time field shows the time spent in LPI mode the since EEE counters

were last cleared.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour

Information

A Mac OS device that supports Bonjour can discover the switch in the network so that you

can find the switch IP address and log in to the local browser interface of the switch. Bonjour

is enabled by default on the switch. You can disable Bonjour for security reasons.

Table 18. Interface Green Mode EEE LPI History information

Field Description

Sample No. Sample index.

Time Since The Sample Was

Recorded Each time the page is refreshed, it shows a different time as it reflects the

difference between current time and time at which the sample was

recorded.

Percentage Time spent in LPI

mode since last sample Percentage of time spent in LPI mode during the current measurement

interval.

Percentage Time spent in LPI

mode since last reset Percentage of time spent in LPI mode since EEE LPI statistics were reset.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Manage the Bonjour Settings

To manage the Bonjour settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Bonjour > Bonjour Configuration.

The Bonjour Global Configuration page displays.

6. Select one of the following radio buttons:

•Disable. Bonjour is disabled.

•Enable. Bonjour is enabled. This is the default setting.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View Bonjour Information

To view Bonjour information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Bonjour > Bonjour Details.

The Bonjour Information page displays. The page also shows the Published Services

section.

The Bonjour Information section shows whether Bonjour is enabled on the switch.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Control the LEDs

You can turn the system LEDs and port LEDs on the switch on and off. By default, a port LED

lights when you connect a powered-on device to the port. When the switch functions with its

LEDs off, we refer to it as Quiet mode.

To control the LEDs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

Table 19. Published Services information

Field Description

Service Name The Bonjour service names in the switch.

Type The Bonjour service type names in the switch.

Domain The Bonjour service domain in the switch.

Port The Bonjour service port number.

TXT data The Bonjour service text.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > LED Control.

6. Select the System LEDs On or Off radio button.

By default, the On radio button is selected and the system LEDs are enabled. When you

select the Off radio button, the Cloud LED is disabled, and for models GC728XP and

GC752XP, the Max PoE LED is disabled.

7. Select the Port LEDs On or Off radio button.

By default, the On radio button is selected and the port LEDs are enabled. When you

select the Off radio button, the port LEDs are disabled.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Use the Device View

For information about the device view, see Local Browser Interface Device View on page 25.

Configure Power over Ethernet

For information about Power over Ethernet (PoE), see Chapter 8, Manage Power over

Ethernet.

Configure SNMP

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMPv1/v2 and SNMPv3. The switch supports the

configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP agent

generates.

The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that

support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a hyphen (-) prefix. The

main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some

interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

The following sections describe how you can configure SNMP:

•Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community on page 72

•Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings on page 74

•Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags on page 76

•View the Supported MIBs on page 78

•Configure Authentication and Encryption for the SNMPv3 Admin Profile on page 78

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community

Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP V1 and

SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to

change the configuration using SNMP.

Add an SNMP Community:

To add an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. In the Management Station IP field, specify the IP address of the management station.

7. In the Management Station IP Mask field, specify the subnet mask to associate with the

management station IP address.

Together, the management station IP address and the management station IP mask

denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use the community to

access this device. If either the management station IP address or management station

IP mask value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, each client’s

address is ANDed with the mask, as is the management station IP address. If the values

are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the management station IP address is

192.168.1.0 and the management station IP mask is 255.255.255.0, any client whose

address is in the 192.168.1.0–192.168.1.255 range is allowed access.

To allow access from only one station, use that station’s IP address as the management

station IP address and use a management station IP mask value of 255.255.255.255.

8. In the Community String field, specify a community name.

9. From the Access Mode menu, select the access level for this community, which is either

Read/Write or Read Only.

10. From the Status menu, select to enable or disable the community.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

If you select Enable, the community name must be unique among all valid community

names or the set requests are rejected. If you select Disable, the community name

becomes invalid.

11. Click the Add button.

The selected community is added.

Modify an Existing SNMP Community

To modify an existing SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the community.

7. Update the desired fields.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP Community

To delete an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the community to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The community is removed.

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings

You can configure settings for each SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 management host that must

receive notifications about traps generated by the device. The SNMP management host is

also known as the SNMP trap receiver.

Add an SNMP Trap Receiver

To add an SNMP trap receiver:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Configuration .

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. In the Recipients IP field, enter the IPv4 address in the x.x.x.x format to receive SNMP traps

from this device.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

7. From the Version menu, select the trap version to be used by the SNMP trap receiver:

•SNMPv1. The switch uses SNMPv1 to send traps to the receiver.

•SNMPv2. The switch uses SNMPv2 to send traps to the receiver.

8. In the Community String field, specify the name of the SNMP community that includes

the SNMP management host and the SNMP agent on the device.

This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive. The community name must

be unique.

9. From the Status menu, select Enable to enable the switch to send traps to the receiver or

Disable to prevent the switch from sending traps to the receiver.

10. Click the Add button.

The receiver configuration is added.

Modify Information for an Existing Trap SNMP Recipient

To modify information for an existing trap SNMP recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Configuration .

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the recipient.

7. Update the fields as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Delete an SNMP Trap Recipient

To delete an SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Configuration .

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the recipient.

7. Click the Delete button.

The trap recipient is removed.

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags

You can enable or disable traps the switch can send to an SNMP manager. When the

condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to

any enabled SNMP trap receivers, and a message is written to the trap log.

To configure the trap flags:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Flags.

The Trap Flags page displays.

6. Configure the following options:

•Authentication. If this option is enabled, SNMP traps are sent when events involving

authentication occur. For example, when a user attempts to access the local browser

interface but fails to provide a valid user name and password, a trap is sent.

•Link Up/Down. If this option is enabled, SNMP traps are sent when the

administrative or operational state of a physical or logical link changes.

•Spanning T ree. If this option is enabled, SNMP traps are sent when various spanning

tree events occur.

•ACL. If this option is enabled, SNMP traps are sent when a packet matches a

configured ACL rule that includes ACL logging.

•PoE. (Models GC728XP and GC752XP only.) If this option is enabled, SNMP traps

are sent when the PoE status changes.

For all options, by default, the Enable radio is selected.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the Supported MIBs

This page displays a list of all MIBs supported by the switch.

To view the supported MIBs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Supported MIBs.

The Status page displays.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure Authentication and Encryption for the SNMPv3

Admin Profile

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol, but for authentication and

encryption, the switch supports only one user (admin). Therefore, you can create or modify

only one profile.

To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Table 20. SNMP supported MIBs

Field Description

Name The RFC number, if applicable, and the name of the MIB.

Description The RFC title or MIB description.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv3 > User Configuration.

The User Configuration page displays.

The SNMPv3 Access Mode field is a read-only field that shows the access privileges for

the user account. Access for the admin account is always Read/Write. Access for all

other accounts is Read Only.

6. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

You can select the MD5 radio button or the SHA radio button. With either of these

options, the user login password is used as SNMPv3 authentication password. For

information about how to configure the login password, see Change the Password on

page 250.

7. To enable encryption, do the following:

a. Select the Encryption Protocol DES radio button to encrypt SNMPv3 packets using

the DES encryption protocol.

b. In the Encryption key field, enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric

characters.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations

on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is

viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on

the LAN.

The following sections describe how you can configure LLDP:

•Configure LLDP Global Settings on page 80

•Configure LLDP Port Settings on page 81

•View the LLDP-MED Network Policy on page 82

•Configure the LLDP-MED Port Settings on page 84

•LLDP-MED Neighbors Information on page 85

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•View Local LLDP Information on page 87

•View LLDP Neighbors Information on page 89

LLDP is a one-way protocol without any request/response sequences. Information is

advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by

stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be

enabled or disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on

all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine

appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

•Autodiscovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 priority, and DiffServ settings),

enabling plug and play networking.

•Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

•Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

•Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices

and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,

serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP Global Settings

You can specify the global LLDP and LLDP-MED parameters that are applied to the switch.

To configure global LLDP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP Configuration.

The LLDP Properties pager displays.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. To configure nondefault values for the following LLDP properties, specify the following

options:

•TLV Advertised Interval. The number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP

advertisements.

•Hold Multiplier. The transmit interval multiplier value, in which the transmit hold

multiplier multiplied by the transmit interval is the time to live (TTL) value that the

switch advertises to its neighbors.

•Reinitializing Delay. The number of seconds that the switch waits before attempting

to reinitialize LLDP on a port after the LLDP operating mode on the port changes.

•T ransmit Delay. The number of seconds that the switch waits between transmissions

of remote data change notifications to one or more SNMP trap receivers configured

on the switch.

7. To configure a nondefault value for LLDP-MED, enter a value in the Fast Start Duration

field.

This value sets the number of LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED fast start

mechanism is initialized, which occurs when a new endpoint device links with the

LLDP-MED network connectivity device.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure LLDP Port Settings

You can specify per-interface LLDP settings.

To configure the LLDP interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port Settings.

The LLDP Port Settings page displays.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. Use the following menus to configure the LLDP settings for the selected ports:

•Admin Status. Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:

-Tx Only. Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

-Rx Only. Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

-Tx and Rx. Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected

ports.

-Disabled. Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

The default is Tx and Rx.

•Management IP Address. Choose whether to advertise the management IP address

from the interface. The possible field values are as follows:

-Stop Advertise. Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.

-Auto Advertise. Advertise the current IP address of the device as the

management IP address.

The default is Auto Advertise.

•Notification. When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the trap manager to

notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disable.

•Optional TLV(s). Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value

(TLV) information from the interface. The default is Enable. The TLV information

includes the system name, system description, system capabilities, and port

description.

For information about how to configure the system name, see View and Configure the

Switch Management Settings on page 29. For information about how to configure the

port description, see Configure Port Settings on page 105.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the LLDP-MED Network Policy

This page displays information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the

LLDP frames on the selected local interface.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To view LLDP-MED network policy information for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Network Policy.

The LLDP-MED Network Policy page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to view the information.

Note: The menu includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled. If no

interfaces are enabled for LLDP, the Interface menu does not display.

The page refreshes and displays the data transmitted in the network policy TLVs for the

interface.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the

page.

Table 21. LLDP-MED network policy information

Field Description

Network Policy Number The policy number.

Application The media application type associated with the policy, which can be one of the

following:

• Unknown

• Voice

• Guest Voice

• Guest Voice Signaling

• Softphone Voice

• Video Conferencing

• Streaming Video

• Video Signaling

A port can receive multiple application types. The application information is

displayed only if a network policy TLV was transmitted from the port.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure the LLDP-MED Port Settings

You can enable LLDP-MED mode on an interface and configure its properties.

To configure LLDP-MED settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Port Settings.

The LLDP-MED Port Settings page displays.

6. From the Port menu, select the port to configure.

7. Use the following menus to enable or disable the following LLDP-MED settings for the

selected port:

•LLDP-MED Status. The administrative status of LLDP-MED on the interface. When

LLDP-MED is enabled, the transmit and receive function of LLDP is effectively

enabled on the interface.

•Notification. When notifications are enabled, the port sends a topology change

notification if a device is connected or removed.

•MED Capabilities. When MED capabilities are enabled, the port transmits the

capabilities type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP PDU frames.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Indicates whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Table 21. LLDP-MED network policy information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Network Policy. When the network policy is enabled, the port transmits the network

policy TLV in LLDP frames.

•Extended MDI-PSE. When the extended MDI-PSE is enabled, the port transmits the

extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

LLDP-MED Neighbors Information

You can display the LLDP-MED neighbor or remote device information for an interface.

To view LLDP-MED Neighbor Information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Neighbors Information.

The page that displays shows multiple sections with information about LLDP-MED

neighbors.

6. From the Interface menu, select an interface.

The menu includes only the interfaces for which LLDP is enabled.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the non-configurable LLDP-MED Neighbors Information that

displays for the selected interface.

Field Description

LLDP-MED Interface Selection

Remote ID Specifies the remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.

Capability Information

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

This section of the page specifies the supported and enabled capabilities that are received in MED TLV on

this port.

Supported Capabilities Specifies supported capabilities that are received in MED TLV on this port.

Enabled Capabilities Specifies enabled capabilities that are received in MED TLV on this port.

Device Class Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected to the

port.

Network Policies Information

This section of the page specifies if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this port.

Media Application Type Specifies the application type: unknown, voicesignaling, guestvoice,

guestvoicesignalling, softphonevoice, videoconferencing, streamingvideo, or

videosignaling.

Information for each application type includes the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP,

tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive information

about one or many of such application types. The application type is

displayed only if a network policy TLV is received on a port.

VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID associated with a particular policy type.

Priority Specifies the priority associated with a particular policy type.

DSCP Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Unknown Bit Status Specifies the unknown bit associated with a particular policy type.

Tagged Bit Status Specifies the tagged bit associated with a particular policy type.

Inventory Information

This section of the page specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.

Hardware Revision Specifies the hardware version of the remote device.

Firmware Revision Specifies the firmware version of the remote device.

Software Revision Specifies software version of the remote device.

Serial Number Specifies the serial number of the remote device.

Manufacturer Name Specifies the manufacturer’s name of the remote device.

Model Name Specifies the model name of the remote device.

Asset Id Specifies the asset ID of the remote device.

Location Information

This section of the page specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.

Sub Type Specifies the type of location information.

Location Information Specifies the location information as a string for a given type of location ID.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View Local LLDP Information

You can view the data that each port advertises through LLDP.

To view local LLDP information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

Extended PoE

This section of the page specifies if the remote device is a PoE device.

Device Type Specifies the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.

Extended PoE PSE

This section of the page specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.

Device Type Specifies the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.

Power Source Specifies the remote port’s PSE power source.

Power Priority Specifies the remote port’s PSE power priority.

Power Value Specifies the remote port’s PSE power value in tenths of watts.

Extended PoE PD

This section of the page specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.

Device Type Specifies the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.

Power Source Specifies the remote port’s PD power source.

Power Priority Specifies the remote port's PD power priority.

Power Value Specifies the remote port's PD power requirement.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select System > Advanced > LLDP > Local Information.

The page that displays shows the Device Information section and the Port Information

section.

The page includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled.

The following table describes the LLDP device information and port summary information.

6. To view additional details about a port, click the name of the port in the Interface column of

the Port Information table.

The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected

port.

Field Description

Device Information

Chassis ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the switch in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The hardware platform identifier for the switch.

System Name The user-configured system name for the switch.

System Description The switch description, which includes information about the product model

and platform.

System Capabilities The primary functions that the switch supports.

Interface Information

Interface The interface associated with the LLDP data.

Port ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the interface in the Port ID field.

Port ID The port number.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port. For information about how to

configure the port description, see Configure Port Settings on page 105.

Advertisement The TLV advertisement status of the port.

Field Description

Managed Address

Address SubType The type of address the management interface uses, such as an IPv4

address.

Address The address used to manage the device.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The number that identifies the port.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View LLDP Neighbors Information

You can view the data that a specified interface received from other LLDP-enabled systems.

To view LLDP information received from a neighbor device:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto Negotiation Supported Indicates whether the interface supports port speed autonegotiation. The

possible values are True and False.

Auto Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True

(enabled) or False (disabled).

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities The port speed autonegotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T half-duplex

mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The MED capabilities enabled on the port.

Current Capabilities The TLVs advertised by the port.

Device Class Network Connectivity indicates that the device is a network connectivity

device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Advanced > LLDP > Neighbor Information.

The Neighbor Information page displays.

If no information was received from a neighbor device, or if the link partner is not

LLDP-enabled, no information displays.

The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that

were discovered.

6. To view additional information about the remote device, click the link in the MSAP Entry

column.

A pop-up window displays information for the selected port.

The following table describes the information transmitted by the neighbor.

Field Description

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote

device.

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device. If the field is blank, the

name might not be configured on the remote system.

Field Description

Port Details

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.

Basic Details

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device.

System Description The description of the selected port associated with the remote system.

System Capabilities The system capabilities of the remote system.

Managed Addresses

Address SubType The type of the management address.

Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The port on the remote device that sent the information.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed autonegotiation.

The possible values are True or False.

Auto-Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True

and False.

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities The port speed autonegotiation capabilities.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Current Capabilities The advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Device Class The LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes are as

follows:

• Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP

services.

• Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class, offering media

streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.

• Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class, offering all

Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support,

and device information management capabilities.

PoE Device Type The PoE device type advertised by the remote device.

PoE Power Source The PoE power type advertised by the remote device.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

PoE Power Priority The PoE power priority advertised by the remote device.

PoE Power Value The PoE power value advertised by the remote device.

Hardware Revision The hardware version advertised by the remote device.

Firmware Revision The firmware version advertised by the remote device.

Software Revision The software version advertised by the remote device.

Serial Number The serial number advertised by the remote device.

Model Name The model name advertised by the remote device.

Asset ID The asset ID advertised by the remote device.

Location Information

Civic The physical location, such as the street address, that the remote device

advertised in the location TLV, for example, 123 45th St. E. The field value

length range is 6–160 characters.

Coordinates The location map coordinates that the remote device advertised in the

location TLV, including latitude, longitude, and altitude.

ECS ELIN The Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN) that the remote device advertised in the location TLV. The

field range is 10–25.

Unknown The unknown location information for the remote device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy advertised by the

remote device.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN T ype Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

LLDP Unknown TLVs

Type The unknown TLV type field.

Value The unknown TLV value field.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure DHCP L2 Relay and DHCP Snooping

The switch supports DHCP L2 Relay, DHCP snooping, and Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI).

DHCP snooping and DAI are Layer 2 security features that examine traffic to help prevent

accidental and malicious attacks on the switch or network.

The following sections describe how to configure DHCP L2 Relay, DHCP snooping, and

Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI):

•Configure a DHCP L2 Relay on page 93

•Configure DHCP Snooping on page 97

Configure a DHCP L2 Relay

DHCP relay agents eliminate the need to connect to a DHCP server on each physical

network. Relay agents populate the giaddr field and also append the Relay Agent Information

option to the DHCP messages. DHCP servers use this option for IP addresses and other

parameter assignment policies. These DHCP relay agents are typically IP routing-aware

devices and are referred to as Layer 3 relay agents. In some network configurations, a need

might exist for Layer 2 devices to append the Relay Agent Information option as they are

closer to the end hosts.

These Layer 2 devices typically operate only as bridges for the network and might not include

an IPv4 address on the network. Lacking a valid IPv4 source address, they cannot relay

packets directly to a DHCP server located on another network. These Layer 2 devices

append the Relay Agent Information option and broadcast the DHCP message.

Enable the Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings

You can enable the global DHCP L2 relay settings for the switch.

To enable DHCP L2 relay global settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration.

The DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Admin Mode Enable radio button.

The default admin mode is disabled.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the DHCP L2 Relay Settings for a VLAN

You can configure the DHCP L2 relay settings for a VLAN.

To configure the DHCP L2 relay settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration.

The DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page displays.

6. Select one or more VLANs, or select all VLANs by selecting the check box in the table

heading.

7. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the

selected VLAN or VLANs.

The default is Disable.

8. From the Circuit ID Mode menu, select to enable the interface number to be added as the

circuit ID in DHCP option 82 or to disable the interface number from being added as the

circuit ID in DHCP option 82.

The default is Disable.

9. In the Remote ID String field, enter a remote ID description of up to 32 characters.

10. Click the Apply button.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Your settings are saved.

Configure the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Settings

You can configure the DHCP L2 relay interface settings.

To configure the DHCP L2 relay interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration.

The DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the

selected interface.

The default is Disable.

9. From the 82 Option Trust Mode menu, select to enable or disable an interface to be trusted

for DHCP L2 Relay (Option-82) received.

The default is Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View or Clear the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics

You can view information about the DHCP L2 relay interfaces.

To view or clear the DHCP L2 relay interface statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics.

The DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Field Description

Interface The interface from which the DHCP message is received.

Untrusted Server

Messages With Opt82 The number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted server.

Untrusted Client

Messages With Opt82 The number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

9. To clear all interfaces statistics, click the Clear button.

Configure DHCP Snooping

DHCP snooping is a useful feature that provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP

messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. An untrusted

message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall and that can

cause traffic attacks within your network. The DHCP snooping binding table contains the

MAC address, IP address, lease time, binding type, VLAN number, and interface information

that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. An untrusted interface is an

interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A

trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the

network.

DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. It also

provides way to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and

trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.

Enable the Global DHCP Snooping Settings

You can view and configure the global settings for DHCP snooping.

To enable the global DHCP snooping settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

T rusted Server Messages

Without Opt82 The number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server.

Trusted Client Messages

Without Opt82 The number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client.

Field Description

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.

6. Select the DHCP Snooping Mode Enable radio button.

7. To enable the verification of the sender’s MAC address for DHCP snooping, select the MAC

Address Validation Enable radio button.

When MAC address validation is enabled, the device checks packets that are received on

an untrusted interface to verify that the MAC address and the DHCP client hardware

address match. If the addresses do not match, the device drops the packet.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN

To enable DHCP snooping for all interfaces that are members of a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN on which DHCP snooping must be enabled.

7. From the DHCP Snooping Mode menu, select Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings

You can view and configure each port as a trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses

received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or

BootP) responses received on that port are discarded.

Configure System Information

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To configure DHCP snooping interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Trust Mode menu, select the desired trust mode:

•Disabled. The interface is considered to be untrusted and could potentially be used

to launch a network attack. DHCP server messages are checked against the bindings

database. On untrusted ports, DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:

-DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) are dropped.

-DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC address

is in the snooping database but the binding’s interface is other than the interface

where the message was received.

-DHCP packets are dropped when the source MAC address does not match the

client hardware address if MAC address validation is globally enabled.

•Enabled. The interface is considered to be trusted and forwards DHCP server

messages without validation.

9. From the Invalid Packets menu, select the packet logging mode.

Configure System Information

100

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

When enabled, the DHCP snooping feature generates a log message when an invalid

packet is received and dropped by the interface.

10. In the Rate Limit(pps) field, specify the rate limit value for DHCP snooping purposes.

If the incoming rate of DHCP packets per second exceeds the configured burst interval

per second, the port shuts down. If the rate limit value is N/A, then the burst interval is

also nonapplicable, and rate limiting is disabled.

11. In the Burst Interval(secs) field, specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purposes on

this interface.

If the rate limit is N/A, then the burst interval is also nonapplicable, and the field displays

N/A.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Static DHCP Bindings

You can view , add, and remove static bindings in the DHCP snooping bindings database and

to view or clear the dynamic bindings in the bindings table.

To configure static DHCP bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration.

The Static Binding Configuration page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface on which the DHCP client is authorized.

7. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address for the binding to be added.

This is the key to the binding database.

8. From the VLAN ID menu, select the ID of the VLAN the client is authorized to use.

9. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the client.

Configure System Information

101

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

10. Click the Add button.

The DHCP snooping binding entry is added to the database.

The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows information about the DHCP bindings that

were dynamically (that is, automatically) learned on each interface on which DHCP snooping

is enabled. The following table describes the dynamic bindings information.

Configure the Persistent Location of the DHCP Snooping Bindings Database

You can configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database. The

bindings database can be stored locally on the device or on a remote system somewhere

else in the network. The device must be able to reach the IP address of the remote system to

send bindings to a remote database.

To configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Persistent Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration page displays.

6. Specify where the DHCP snooping bindings database is located:

Table 22. DHCP Dynamic Configuration information

Field Description

Interface The interface on which the DHCP client message was received.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the DHCP client that sent the message. This is the

key to the binding database.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the client interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the client by the DHCP server.

Lease Time The remaining IP address lease time for the client.

Configure System Information

102

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Local. The binding table is stored locally on the switch.

•Remote. The binding table is stored on a remote TFTP server.

If the database is stored on a remote server, specify the following information:

a. In the Remote IP Address field, enter the IP address of the TFTP server.

b. In the Remote File Name field, enter the file name of the DHCP snooping

bindings database in which the bindings are stored.

7. In the Write Delay field, specify the time to wait between writing bindings information to

persistent storage.

The delay allows the device to collect as many entries as possible (new and removed)

before writing them to the persistent file.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View or Clear the DHCP Snooping Statistics

You can view and clear per-interface statistics about the DHCP messages filtered by the

DHCP snooping feature on untrusted interfaces.

To view or clear the DHCP snooping statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Statistics.

The DHCP Snooping Statistics page displays.

6. To refresh the information on the page, click the Refresh button.

7. To clear all interfaces statistics, click the Clear button.

Configure System Information

103

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the DHCP snooping statistics.

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules

For information about PoE timer schedules, see Chapter 8, Manage Power over Ethernet.

Table 23. DHCP Snooping Statistics information

Field Description

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

MAC Verify Failures The number of DHCP messages that were dropped because the source MAC address

and client hardware address did not match. MAC address verification is performed only if

it is globally enabled.

Client Ifc Mismatch The number of packets that were dropped by DHCP snooping because the interface and

VLAN on which the packet was received do not match the client’s interface and VLAN

information stored in the binding database.

DHCP Server Msgs

Received The number of DHCP server messages ((DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) that were dropped on an untrusted port.

104

3. Configure Switching

This chapter covers the following topics:

•Configure Port Settings

•Configure Link Aggregation Groups

•Configure VLANs

•Configure a Voice VLAN

•Configure Auto-V oIP

•Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

•Configure Multicast

•View, Search, and Configure the MAC Address Table

•Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection

Configure Switching

105

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Port Settings

You can view, configure, and monitor the physical port information for the ports (that is, the

physical interfaces) on the switch.

To configure port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration.

The Port Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces (ports, LAGs, or both) by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a port.

The string can be up to 64 characters in length.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This sets the port control administrative mode. You must select Enable in order for the

port to participate in the network. The default is Enable.

10. From the Auto-negotiation menu, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the autonegotiation mode for this port. The default is Enable.

Note: After you change the autonegotiation mode, the switch might be

inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

Configure Switching

106

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

11. In the Speed field, specify the speed value for the selected port.

-Auto. All supported speeds. If you select Auto, the duplex mode and speed are

set by the autonegotiation process. The port’ s maximum capability (full duplex and

1000 Mbps) are advertised. Otherwise, your selection determines the port’s

duplex mode and transmission rate. The default setting is Auto.

-10. 10 Mbits/sec.

-100. 100 Mbits/sec.

-1000. 1000 Mbits/sec. This selection is available only if autonegotiation is

enabled.

The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period

(.) and a space ( ). For you to set the auto-negotiation speed, the autonegotiation

mode must be set to Enable. The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the speed settings, the switch might be inaccessible

for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

12. From the Duplex Mode menu, select the duplex mode for the selected port.

Possible values are as follows:

•Auto. Indicates that speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.

•Full. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in both

directions simultaneously.

•Half. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in only

one direction at a time.

The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

13. Use the Link Trap menu to specify whether or not to send a trap when link status changes.

The Link Trap menu is enabled by default. However, for LAG interfaces, the menu is

disabled.

14. In the Frame Size field, specify the maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or

is configured to use, including Ethernet header, CRC, and payload.

The range is 1500 to 9198. The default maximum frame size is 1500.

15. From the Flow Control menu, select the configuration for IEEE 802.3 flow control.

•Disable. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames, and

data loss could occur. This is the default setting.

•Symmetric. If the port buffers become full, the switch sends pause frames to stop

traffic.

Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number

of frames being switched. When you enable flow control, the switch can send a pause

Configure Switching

107

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

frame to stop traffic on the port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the

port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner

devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the time that is specified in the

pause frame. When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a

specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. The

switch also honors incoming pause frames by temporarily halting transmission.

•Asymmetric. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames,

and data loss could occur . However , the switch does honor incoming pause frames by

temporarily halting transmission.

Note: For LAG interfaces, flow control mode is displayed as a blank field

because flow control is not applicable.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Configure Link Aggregation Groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port channels, allow you to

combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the

aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load

sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default

becomes a member of the default management VLAN (that is, VLAN 1).

Table 24. Port Configuration information

Field Description

Port Type For normal ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the possible values are

as follows:

• Mirrored. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is

copied to the probe port.

• Probe. Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.

• Trunk Member. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk.

Look at the LAG pages for more information.

Physical Status The port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.

MAC Address The physical address of the specified interface.

PortList Bit Offset The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object

type PortList is used to manage in SNMP.

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Configure Switching

108

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must

participate in the same protocols. A static port channel interface does not require a partner

system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

The switch supports static LAGs. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, the port

neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.

Configure LAG Settings

You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group, which is also known as a port channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it

were a single link.

To configure LAG settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Configuration.

The LAG Configuration page displays.

6. In the LAG Name field, enter a name for the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

7. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

The description can be up to 64 characters in length.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The default is Enable.

9. From the Hash Mode menu, select the load-balancing mode for a port channel (LAG):

•1 Src MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port. This mode uses the source MAC

address, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port that are associated with the packet.

Configure Switching

109

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•2 Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port. This mode uses the destination MAC

address, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port that are associated with the packet.

•3 Src/Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port. This mode uses the source and

destination MAC addresses, VLAN, EtherT ype, and incoming port that are associated

with the packet. This is the default mode.

•4 Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. This mode uses the source IP address and

source TCP or UDP port value that are associated with the packet.

•5 Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. This mode uses the destination IP address

and destination TCP or UDP port value that are associated with the packet.

•6 Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port fields. This mode uses the source and destination

IP addresses and source and destination TCP or UDP port values that are associated

with the packet.

Note: The switch balances traffic on a port channel (LAG) by selecting one

of the links in the channel over which packets must be transmitted. The

switch selects the link by creating a binary pattern from selected fields

in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link.

10. From the STP Mode menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) administrative mode

associated with the LAG. The possible values are as follows:

•Disable. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

•Enable. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

11. From the Link Trap menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether to send a trap when

the link status changes.

The default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

12. From the LAG Type menu, select Static or LACP:

•Static. Disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the selected LAG. The

LAG is configured manually. The default is Static.

•LACP. Disables LACP on the selected LA. The LAG is configured automatically.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 25. LAG Configuration information

Field Description

LAG ID Identifier of the LAG.

Active Ports The ports that are actively participating in the LAG.

LAG State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configure Switching

110

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure LAG Membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port channel. The switch can treat the

port channel as a single link.

To configure LAG membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Membership.

The LAG Membership page displays.

6. From the LAG ID menu, select the LAG ID.

7. In the LAG Name field, enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

8. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to include as a member of the selected

LAG.

A selected port is displayed by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

10. To view the members of the LAG, click the Current members button.

A pop-up window opens and displays the list of current members.

Configure Switching

111

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Set the LACP System Priority

The LACP configuration page is used to set the LACP system priority.

To configure LACP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Configuration.

The LACP Configuration page displays.

6. In the LACP System Priority field, specify the device’s link aggregation priority relative to

the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled.

A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the value of the parameter

globally by specifying a priority from 1 to 65535. The default value is 32768.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP Port Priority Settings

The LACP port configuration page is used to configure the LACP priority value for the selected

port and the administrative LACP time-out value.

To configure LACP port priority settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

Configure Switching

112

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Port Configuration.

The LACP Port Priority page displays.

6. Select one or more interfaces (ports only, no LAGs) by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. In the LACP Priority field, specify the LACP priority value for the selected interfaces.

This value specifies the device’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the

other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled. A higher value indicates a

lower priority. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 128.

8. In the Timeout field, configure the administrative LACP time-out value:

•Long. Specifies a long time-out value. This is the default setting.

•Short. Specifies a short time-out value.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both

bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2

header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which

provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically

separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast

packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be

grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit

the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the packet

Configure Switching

113

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle traffic for

more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. The switch supports up

to 256 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default and is the default VLAN of which all ports are

members. VLAN 4089 is also created by default and is the Auto-Video VLAN. By default, the

Auto-Video VLAN does not include any members.

Manage Basic VLANs

You can add, change, and delete VLANs. For information about adding members to a VLAN,

see Configure VLAN Membership on page 117.

Add a VLAN

To add a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 1 to 4093.

7. In the VLAN Name field, specify a name for the VLAN.

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The

default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.

8. The VLAN Type field displays the type of the VLAN that you are configuring.

You cannot change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1): it is always type Default.

When you create a VLAN using this page, its type is always Static.

9. Click the Add button.

Configure Switching

114

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The VLAN is added to the switch.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a VLAN

To delete a VLAN from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 1 to 4093.

Note: You cannot delete VLANs 1 and VLAN 4089, which are created by

default.

7. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN is removed.

Reset a VLAN to Its Default Settings

To reset a VLAN to its default settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Configure Switching

115

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

You can also select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Reset Configuration check box.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The default values are as follows:

•All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

•All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

•All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

•All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.

•All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted.

Configure VLAN Trunking

You can configure switchport mode settings on interfaces. The switchport mode defines the

purpose of the port based on the type of device it connects to and constraints the VLAN

configuration of the port accordingly. Assigning the correct switchport mode simplifies VLAN

configuration and minimizes errors.

To configure VLAN trunking:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

Configure Switching

116

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Trunking Configuration.

The Switchport Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Switchport Mode menu, select one of the following modes.

•Access. Access mode is suitable for ports connected to end stations or end users.

Access ports participate in only one VLAN. They accept both tagged and untagged

packets, but always transmit untagged packets.

•General. General mode enables a custom configuration of a port. You can configure

the general port VLAN attributes such as the membership, PVID, tagging, ingress

filter, and so on. For more information, see Configure Port Settings on page 105. By

default, all ports are initially configured in General mode.

•Trunk. Trunk mode is intended for ports that are connected to other switches. Trunk

ports can participate in multiple VLANs, and accept both tagged and untagged

packets.

9. From the Access VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID for the port, which is valid only when

the selection from the Switchport Mode menu Access.

By default, the access VLAN ID is 1.

10. From the Native VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID for the port, which is valid only when

the selection from the Switchport Mode menu Trunk.

By default, the native VLAN ID is 1.

11. In the Trunk Allowed VLANs field, enter the set of VLANs of which the port can be a

member if configured in Trunk mode.

By default, all possible VLANs in range from 1 to 4093 are listed, even if you did not yet

create any VLANs.

Configure Switching

117

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Note the following:

•Use a dash (–) to specify a range.

•Use a comma (,) to separate VLANs in a list. Spaces are not permitted.

•A zero value means that you want to clear the allowed VLANs.

•The All value means that you want to set all VLANs to the range (1 to 4093).

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table shows the nonconfigurable information on the page.

Configure VLAN Membership

To configure VLAN membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership.

Table 26. VLAN Trunking Configuration

Field Description

Native VLAN Tagging • Enable. If VLAN tagging is enabled and the trunk port receives untagged

frames, it forwards them to the native VLAN with no VLAN tag.

• Disable. If VLAN Tagging is disabled, and the port receives untagged

frames, it includes the native VLAN ID in the VLAN tag when forwarding. By

default, VLAN Tagging is disabled.

Configure Switching

118

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

7. In the Group Operation menu, select one of the following options, which applies to all ports

in the VLAN:

•Untag All. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, tags are removed from all

egress packets.

•T ag All. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, all egress packets are tagged.

•Remove All. All ports are removed from the VLAN.

8. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

•T (T agged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN.

9. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

•T (Tagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Switching

119

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

View the VLAN Status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

To view the VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status.

The VLAN Status page displays.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 27. Advanced VLAN membership

Field Definition

VLAN Name The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32

alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always

uses the name Default.

VLAN Type The type of the VLAN you selected:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

Table 28. VLAN status

Field Definition

VLAN ID The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1

to 4093.

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named Default.

VLAN 4089 is always named Auto-Video.

Configure Switching

120

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Port PVID Settings

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. The following requirements apply to a

PVID:

•You must define a PVID for all ports.

•If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.

•To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as

a member (see Configure VLAN Membership on page 117).

To configure PVID settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration.

The PVID Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces (ports, LAGs, or both) by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you added.

• Auto-Video. (VLAN ID = 4089). Always present.

Member Ports The ports that are included in the VLAN.

Table 28. VLAN status (continued)

Field Definition

Configure Switching

121

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames

received on this port.

The default is 1.

9. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a

comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

10. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to

separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag

configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword. Port tagging for the VLAN can be

set only if the port is a member of this VLAN.

11. From the Acceptable Frame menu, specify the types of frames that can be received on this

port:

•Admit All. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are

accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either option,

VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

•VLAN only. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are

discarded.

•Admit Untagged Only. Untagged frames received on this port are accepted and

assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. VLAN-tagged frames are

discarded.

12. From the Ingress Filtering menu, select one of the following options:

•Enable. The frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which

this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in

the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that

received this frame.

•Disable. All frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge

specification. The default is Disable.

13. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets

arriving at the port.

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Switching

122

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN

and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC-to-VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC-to-VLAN table. An

entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The

MAC-to-VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, a system-wide

table exists with MAC address–to–VLAN ID mappings).

When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the

MAC-to-VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found,

the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged

it maintains this value. Otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified

against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues.

Otherwise, the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC

address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.

Add a MAC-Based VLAN

To add a MAC-based VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 29. Nonconfigurable fields on the PVID Configuration page

Field Description

Current Ingress Filtering Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled for the interface.

Untagged VLANs The number of untagged VLANs for the interface.

Tagged VLANs The number of tagged VLANs for the interface.

Forbidden VLANs The number of forbidden VLANs for the interface.

Dynamic VLANs Indicates None because the switch does not support dynamic VLANs.

Configure Switching

123

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the MAC Address field, enter a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.

8. Click the Add button.

The MAC address is added to the VLAN mapping table.

Delete a MAC Address From VLAN Mapping

To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the MAC Address field, enter a valid MAC address.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN exists.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.

8. Click the Delete button.

The MAC address is removed from the VLAN mapping.

Configure Switching

124

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By

default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,

untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either

port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled

according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames

received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged

frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the port VLAN ID, either the

default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN

Configuration page.

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group forms a one-to-one

relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include

multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned

automatically.

To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

The Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays.

6. In the Group ID field, type a number for the new group.

You can enter a number in the range from 1–128.

7. In the Group Name field, type a name for the new group.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

8. In the Protocol field, enter one or more protocols that must be associated with the group.

Configure Switching

125

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

You can enter keywords such as arp, ip, and ipx. Separate keywords with a comma. You

can also enter hexadecimal or decimal values in the range of 0x0600 (1536) to 0xFFFF

(65535).

9. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

The ID can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assign this

VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this group.

10. Click the Add button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership

To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership.

The protocol Based VLAN Group Membership page displays.

6. From the Group ID menu, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.

The Group Name field shows the name that is associated with the group.

Table 30. Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration information

Field Description

Ports Display all the member ports that belong to the group.

Configure Switching

126

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

7. In the Ports table and LAG table, click each port and LAG that you want to include in the

protocol-based VLAN group.

A protocol-based VLAN group can include both port and LAGs. A selected port or LAG is

displayed by a check mark.

8. Click the Apply button

Your settings are saved.

9. To view the members of the group, click the Current members button.

A pop-up window opens and displays the list of current members.

Configure a Voice VLAN

You can configure the parameters for a voice VLAN configuration.

To configure a voice VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration.

The page that displays shows the Voice VLAN Global Admin section and Voice VLAN

Configuration section.

6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the voice VLAN for the switch. The default is Disable.

7. Select the interface by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

Configure Switching

127

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Interface Mode menu, select the voice VLAN mode for selected interfaces:

•Disable. This is the default value.

•None. Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

•VLAN ID. Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic. With this selection, you

can enter a Dot1p value in the Value field.

•Dot1p. Configure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. With this

selection, you must enter a dot1p value in the Value field.

•Untagged. Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

9. In the Value field, enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.

This field is enabled only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as the interface mode.

10. In the CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

The default is Disable.

11. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Enable. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed

on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices

are authorized through dot1x.

Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.

12. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.

The valid range is 0 to 64. The default value is 0.

The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on the

interface.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Auto-VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network. Because

voice traffic is typically more time-sensitive than data traffic, the Auto-VoIP feature helps

provide a classification mechanism for voice packets so that they can be prioritized above

data packets in order to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VoIP feature,

voice prioritization is provided based on call-control protocols (SIP, SCCP, H.323) or OUI bits.

Configure Switching

128

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings

To prioritize time-sensitive voice traffic over data traffic, protocol-based Auto-VoIP checks for

packets carrying the following VoIP protocols:

•Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

•H.323

•Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP)

VoIP frames that are received on ports that for which the Auto-VoIP feature is enabled are

marked with the specified CoS traffic class value.

To configure protocol-based port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings.

The page displays the Protocol Based Global Settings section and the Protocol Based

Port Settings section.

6. From the Prioritization Type menu, select Traffic Class or Remark.

This specifies the type of prioritization.

7. From the Class Value menu, specify the CoS tag value to be reassigned for packets

received on the voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.

8. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

9. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

Configure Switching

129

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

10. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of each interface.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties

With Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI)–based Auto-VoIP, voice prioritization is

provided based on OUI bits.

To configure Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties.

The OUI-based Properties page displays.

6. In the Auto-VoIP VLAN ID field, enter the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.

No default VLAN exists for Auto-VoIP, you must create a VLAN for Auto-VoIP.

7. From the OUI-based priority menu, select the OUI-based priority of the switch.

The default value is 7.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Switching

130

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure OUI-Based Port Settings

The port settings page allows you to configure the OUI port settings.

To configure OUI-based port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings.

The OUI Port Settings page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of each interface.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Switching

131

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Manage the OUI Table

Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI in a network adapter to help identify a

hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number assigned by the IEEE registration

authority. The switch comes preconfigured with the following OUIs that identify the IP phone

manufacturer:

•00:01:E3: SIEMENS

•00:03:6B: CISCO1

•00:12:43: CISCO2

•00:0F:E2: H3C

•00:60:B9: NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E: PINTEL

•00:E0:75: VERILINK

•00:E0:BB: 3COM

•00:04:0D: A VA Y A1

•00:1B:4F: A VA Y A2

•00:04:13: SNOM

You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on

the network.

Configure the OUI Table

To configure the OUI Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

Configure Switching

132

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

Up to 128 OUIs can be configured.

7. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters. The following OUIs are present in

the configuration by default:

•00:01:E3 - SIEMENS

•00:03:6B - CISCO1

•00:12:43 - CISCO2

•00:0F:E2 - H3C

•00:60:B9 - NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E - PINTEL

•00:E0:75 - VERILINK

•00:E0:BB - 3COM

•00:04:0D - AVAYA1

•00:1B:4F - AVAYA2

•00:04:13 - SNOM

8. Click the Add button.

The telephony OUI entry is added.

Delete One or More OUI Prefixes From the OUI Table

To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

Configure Switching

133

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. Select the check box next to each OUI prefix to be removed.

7. Click the Delete button.

The telephony OUI entries are removed.

Display the Auto-VoIP Status

You can display the Auto-VoIP status.

To view the Auto-VoIP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status.

The Auto-VoIP Status page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.

STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning

tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.

Table 31. Auto-VoIP status

Field Description

Auto-VoIP VLAN ID The Auto-VoIP VLAN ID.

Maximum Number of Voice Channels Supported The maximum number of voice channels supported.

Number of Voice Channels Detected The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.

Configure Switching

134

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Spanning Tree Protocol Overview

Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For

information on configuring Common STP, see Configure CST Port Settings on page 137.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of spanning tree to

efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the spanning tree

behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight

modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid

transitioning of the port to the forwarding state). The difference between the RSTP and the

traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity

and ports that are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the

forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are

represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible with both

RSTP and STP. It behaves in a way that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges. An MSTP

bridge can be configured to behave entirely as an RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.

Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration names, digest keys, and revision levels

must match. For additional information about regions and their effect

on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Configure STP Settings

The STP Configuration page contains fields for enabling STP on the switch.

To configure STP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration.

Configure Switching

135

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The Global Settings page displays.

6. Configure the following options:

•Spanning Tree State. Enable or disable the spanning tree operation on the switch.

•STP Operation Mode. Specify the STP version for the switch. The options are STP,

RSTP, and MSTP.

For more information, see Spanning Tree Protocol Overview on page 134.

•Configuration Name. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently

being used.

The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

•Configuration Revision Level. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration

currently being used.

The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.

•Forward BPDU while STP Disabled. Enable or disable the BPDU Flood.

The BPDU flood option specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while

spanning tree is disabled on the switch.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable STP Status fields displayed on the page.

Table 32. STP configuration status

Field Description

Configuration Digest Key Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

STP Status

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology Change The time in day-hour-minute-second format since the topology of the CST

last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the CST.

Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating

whether a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST.

Possible values are True and False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost Path cost to the designated root for the CST.

Root Port Port to access the designated root for the CST.

Max Age (secs) The maximum age timer controls the maximum length of time in seconds

that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information.

Configure Switching

136

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure CST Settings

You can configure a Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on the

switch.

To configure CST settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration.

The CST Configuration page displays.

6. Specify the CST options:

•Bridge Priority. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a

priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes

the root bridge. Specify the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of

4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically

set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the

priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0.

The default value is 32768.

Forward Delay (secs) The derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.

Hold Time (secs) Minimum time in seconds between the transmission of configuration

BPDUs.

CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST regional root.

CST Path Cost Path cost to the CST tree regional root.

Table 32. STP configuration status (continued)

Field Description

Configure Switching

137

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Bridge Max Age (secs). The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must wait before

implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value must be

less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 *

(Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

•Bridge Hello Time (secs). The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a root bridge must wait

between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be

less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) – 1. The default hello time value is 2.

•Bridge Forward Delay (secs). The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the

time in seconds a bridge must remains in a listening and learning state before

forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

•Spanning Tree Maximum Hops. The maximum number of bridge hops the

information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid

range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the MSTP Status information that is displayed.

Configure CST Port Settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on a specific

port on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled if as error condition occurs such as severe BPDU

flooding with more than 15 BPDUs in a 3-second interval.

To configure CST port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Table 33. STP advanced CST configuration, MSTP status

Field Description

MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the

corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID

associated with each of them.

FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs

associated with each of them.

Configure Switching

138

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the STP Status menu, select the option to enable or disable the spanning tree

administrative mode associated with the port or port channel.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Disable.

9. From the Fast Link menu, select whether the specified port is an edge port within the CST.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Disable.

10. From the BPDU Forwarding menu, configure BPDU forwarding.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Disable. When BPDU

forwarding is enabled, the switch forwards the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when

STP is disabled on this port.

11. From the Auto Edge menu, specify if the port is allowed to become an edge port if it does

not detect BPDUs for some duration.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Enable.

12. In the Path Cost field, set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the common

and internal spanning tree.

Configure Switching

139

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Specify a value in the range of 0 to 200000000. The default is 0. When the path cost is

set to 0, the value is updated with the external path cost from a received STP packet.

13. In the Priority field, specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if you attempt to set the priority to

any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If you try to set it to any value between 16 and

(2*16 – 1), it is set to 16, and so on. The range is 0 to 240. The default value is 128.

14. In the External Port Path Cost field, set the external path cost to a new value for the

specified port in the spanning tree.

The value range is 0 to 200000000. The default is 0.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

16. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

View CST Port Status

You can to display the common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree for a specific

port on the switch.

To view the CST port status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 34. CST port configuration

Field Description

Port State The forwarding state of the port. The default is Disabled.

Port ID The port identifier for the port within the CST. It is made up of the port priority

and the interface number of the port.

Port Path Cost The path cost for the port. The default is 0.

Hello Timer The value of the parameter for the CST. The default is 2 seconds.

Configure Switching

140

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status.

The CST Port Status page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.

Table 35. CST port status

Field Description

Interface Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs

associated with the CST.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each

spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port,

Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled

Port.

Designated Root Root bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base

MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost Path cost offered to the LAN by the designated port.

Designated Bridge Bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the

port.

Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the

next BPDU to be transmitted for this port. It is either True or False.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It is either Enabled

or Disabled.

Point-to-point MAC Derived value of the point-to-point status.

CST Regional Root Bridge identifier of the CST regional root. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

CST Path Cost Path cost to the CST regional root.

Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of this port.

Configure Switching

141

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View Rapid STP Information

You can view information about the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.

To view information about RSTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > RSTP.

The Rapid STP page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the Rapid STP Status information displayed on the page.

Table 36. Rapid STP status information

Field Description

Interface The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port

role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master

Port, or Disabled Port.

Mode Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP, RSTP, and MSTP.

Fast Link Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.

Status The forwarding state of this port.

Configure Switching

142

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Manage MST Settings

You can configure a multiple spanning tree (MST) on the switch.

Configure an MST Instance

To configure an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Configure the MST values:

•MST ID. Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to 4094.

This is visible only when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected.

•Priority. The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running

STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest

priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you

specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the

next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the priority to any

value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0. The default

value is 32768. The valid range is 0–61440.

•Vlan Id. The menu includes all VLANs that are configured on the switch. You can

select VLANs that must be associated with the MST instance or clear VLANs that are

already associated with the MST instance.

7. Click the Add button.

The MST is added.

Configure Switching

143

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the

page.

Modify an MST Instance

To modify an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the instance.

You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.

7. Update the values.

Table 37. MST configuration

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Last TCN The time in day:hour:minute:second format since the topology of the selected MST

instance last changed.

Topology Change Count Number of times that the topology changed for the selected MST instance.

Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology

change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance. It is

either True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the

base MAC address of the bridge

Root Path Cost Path cost to the designated root for this MST instance.

Root Port Port to access the designated root for this MST instance.

Configure Switching

144

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an MST Instance

To delete an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the instance.

7. Click the Delete button.

The MST instance is removed.

Configure MST Port Settings

You can configure and display the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port

on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

To configure MST port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Configure Switching

145

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Configuration.

The Status section and MST Port Configuration section display.

Note: If no MST instances are configured on the switch, the page displays a

“No MSTs Available” message.

6. From the Select MST menu, select the MST for which you want to configure the port

settings.

7. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. Configure the MST values for the selected interfaces:

•Port Priority. The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The

port priority is set in multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16,

the priority is set to the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a

multiple of 16. For example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set to

0. If you specify a number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16. Specify a value

in the range of 0–240. By default, the value is 128.

•Port Path Cost. Set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected

MST instance. Specify a value in the range of 0–200000000. By default, the value

is 0.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

Configure Switching

146

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on

the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.

Table 38. MST port status information

Field Description

Operational Port Path Cost The operational path cost for the port in the MST instance.

Auto-calculated Port Path

Cost Indicates whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not

(Disabled). If the configured value for the port path cost is zero, the path cost is

calculated based on the link speed of the port.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Up Time Since Counters

Last Cleared The time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in days, hours,

minutes, and seconds.

Port Mode The Spanning T ree Protocol administrative mode that is associated with the port

or port channel. The possible values are Enable and Disable.

Port Forwarding State Indicates the current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines

what forwarding action is taken on traffic. Possible port states are as follows:

• Disabled. STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic

while learning MAC addresses.

• Blocking. The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to forward

traffic or learn MAC addresses.

• Listening. The port is currently in the listening mode. The port cannot

forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses.

• Learning. The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot

forward traffic. However, it can learn new MAC addresses.

• Forwarding. The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can

forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate

Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled Port.

Designated Root The root bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost The cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are

less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.

Designated Bridge The bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Configure Switching

147

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View STP Statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs)

transmitted and received on each port.

To view Spanning Tree statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics.

The STP Statistics page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the information available about the STP Statistics page.

Table 39. STP Statistics

Field Description

Interface The physical or port channel interfaces of the switch.

STP BPDUs Received The number of STP BPDUs received at the port.

STP BPDUs Transmitted The number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the port.

RSTP BPDUs Received The number of RSTP BPDUs received at the port.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the port.

MSTP BPDUs Received The number of MSTP BPDUs received at the port.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the port.

Configure Switching

148

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traf fic that is destined to a host group. Host groups for IPv4 multicast are

identified by class D addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Host groups

for IPv6 multicast are identified by the prefix ff00::/8.

View or Clear the MFDB Table

The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active

multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair.

Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

To view or clear the MFDB Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table.

The MFDB Table page displays.

6. In the Search by MAC Address field, enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

9. To clear the information, click the Clear button.

Configure Switching

149

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the information in the MFDB table.

View the MFDB Statistics

To view the MFDB statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics.

The MFDB Statistics page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

Table 40. MFDB table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

Component The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding

Database. Possible values are IGMP snooping, GMRP, Static Filtering and

MLD snooping.

T ype The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end

user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning

process or protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are

Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interfaces The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering

(Flt:) for the selected address.

Forwarding Interfaces The list of forwarding interfaces. This list is derived from combining all

forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as static

filtering interfaces.

Configure Switching

150

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.

Configure the Auto-Video Settings

You can configure the auto-video settings for multicast traffic.

To the configure auto-video settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > Auto-Video.

The Auto-Video Configuration page displays.

6. Select one of the following radio buttons:

•Select the Disable radio button to globally disable the Auto-Video mode for the

switch.

•Select the Enable radio button to globally enable the Auto-Video mode for the switch.

The Auto-Video VLAN field shows the ID for the Auto-Video VLAN. By default, the VLAN

ID is 4089.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Table 41. MFDB Statistics information

Field Description

Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database table can

hold.

Most MFDB Entries Since

Last Reset The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast Forwarding

Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB high-water

mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

Configure Switching

151

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure IGMP Snooping

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to

forward multicast traffic intelligently. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host

group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to

239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic

only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting

the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

IGMP Snooping Overview

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent

placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these

segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the

switch forwards a copy to each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes

connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by

all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to

less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a

small number of nodes. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is

receptive to the packet. While nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets

addressed to unrequested group addresses, they cannot transmit new packets onto the

shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The problem of

wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in

full-duplex links.

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The

switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the

network to determine which segments receive packets directed to the group address.

In addition to building and maintaining lists of multicast group memberships, the IGMP

snooping switch also maintains a list of multicast routers. Multicast packets are forwarded on

ports to which multicast routers are connected. With IGMP snooping, only one querier can be

active in the network. All other routers in the network are suppressed and are not detectable

by the switch. If a query is not received on an interface within a specified period, the interface

is removed from the list of interfaces to which multicast routers are attached. However, by

default, the multicast router expiration time is zero, that is, the multicast router does not

expire.

A statically configured router that is connected to an interface or VLAN on the switch is

automatically added to the list with learned multicast routers. The interface must be active or

must be both active and a member of the VLAN.

Configure Switching

152

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure IGMP Snooping Globally

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists

for multicast traffic.

To configure IGMP snooping globally:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping Configuration page displays.

6. Select the IGMP Snooping Status Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies whether IGMP snooping is enabled for the switch. The default is Enable.

7. Select the Validate IGMP IP header Enable or Disable radio button.

When IGMP IP header validation is enabled, any IGMP IP header must include the

Router Alert, ToS, and TTL information. Otherwise, the IGMP packet is discarded. The

default value is Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics

on the page.

Table 42. IGMP Snooping Configuration information

Field Description

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for IGMP

Snooping The interfaces that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

Configure Switching

153

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces

To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Interface

Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the

switch. The default is Disable.

9. In the Host Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a

particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping Querier The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping querier.

Table 42. IGMP Snooping Configuration information (continued)

Field Description

Configure Switching

154

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

10. In the Max Response Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait after sending a

query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that

interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

11. In the MRouter Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query

on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

12. From the Fast Leave Mode menu, select whether fast leave mode is enabled.

The option are Enable and Disable. The default is Disable.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IGMP Snooping Table

You can view all of the entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database that were created for

IGMP snooping.

To view the entries in the IGMP snooping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Table.

The IGMP Snooping Table page displays.

6. In the Search By MAC Address field, specify the MAC address whose MFDB table entry

you want to view.

Configure Switching

155

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

9. To clear the information, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the information in the IGMP snooping table.

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs

To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

Table 43. IGMP Snooping Table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering

information. The format is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated

by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID for which the switch holds forwarding and filtering information.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end

user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or

protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are

Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interface The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for the

associated address.

Configure Switching

156

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, in the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

7. Configure the IGMP snooping values:

•Admin Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The

default is Disable.

•Fast Leave Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave mode for the

specified VLAN ID. The default is Disable.

•Host Timeout. Set the value for group membership interval of IGMP snooping for the

specified VLAN ID. The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600 seconds.

•Maximum Response Time. Set the value for the maximum response time of IGMP

snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 to Group Membership

Interval –1. This value must be greater than group membership interval value.

•MRouter Timeout. Set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP snooping for

the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds.

•Report Suppression Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression

mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the

suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a Layer 3

membership table. The results is that only the most essential reports are sent to the

IGMP routers so that the routers can continue to receive the multicast traffic.The

default is Disable.

•Querier Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP querier mode. If proxy querier mode is

disabled, then an IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to

an IGMP leave packet. The default is Disable.

•Query Interval. Set the IGMP query interval for the specified VLAN ID. The valid

range is 1 to 1800 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN

To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure Switching

157

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

7. Update the values.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN

To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

7. Click the Delete button.

Snooping is disabled on the VLAN and the VLAN is removed from the table.

Configure Multicast Router Interfaces for IGMP Snooping

You can configure an interface as the designated interface to which a multicast router is

attached. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router

reachable from this interface. Configuring a multicast router interface is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets

Configure Switching

158

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

accordingly. It is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast router always

receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

To configure multicast router interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

The Multicast Router Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN for IGMP Snooping

You can configure an interface to forward snooped IGMP packets only from a specific VLAN

to the multicast router that is attached to the interface. This configuration is usually not

required because the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the IGMP

packets accordingly. However , in a complex network, it might be required if you want to make

sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch.

Configure Switching

159

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To configure a multicast router VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN

Configuration.

The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

7. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

8. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier

An IGMP snooping querier is a device that queries devices on the network for multicast

membership.

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices

on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP

querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with

the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not

receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to

the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information about IGMP snooping queriers on the network

and, separately, on VLANs.

Configure Switching

160

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure the Global IGMP Snooping Querier Settings

You can configure the global settings for an IGMP snooping querier.

To configure the global IGMP snooping querier settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier Configuration.

The Querier Configuration page displays.

6. Configure the following settings:

•Querier Admin Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Enable.

•Snooping Querier Address. Enter the snooping querier IP address to be used as

the source address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address

is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent.

•IGMP Version. Specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.

The range is 1 to 2. The default value is 2.

•Query Interval(secs). Specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries

sent by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 and

1800. The default value is 60.

•Querier Expiry Interval(secs). Specify the time interval in seconds after which the

last querier information is removed. The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the

range of 60 and 300. The default value is 125.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The page lists the VLAN IDs for the VLANs on which the IGMP snooping querier feature

is enabled.

Configure Switching

161

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier for a VLAN

You can configure an IGMP snooping querier for use with a VLAN on the network.

To configure an IGMP querier snooping for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select New Entry.

7. Configure the following settings:

•VLAN ID. The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.

•Querier Election Participate Mode. Enable or disable querier this mode:

-Disable. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the

snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.

-Enable. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the lowest

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

•Snooping Querier VLAN Address. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be

used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Switching

162

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Remove an IGMP Snooping Querier From a VLAN

You can remove an IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN.

To remove an IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

7. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The IGMP snooping querier is no longer supported on the VLAN.

The VLAN itself is not deleted.

Display the IGMP Snooping Querier Status for VLANs

To display the IGMP snooping querier status for VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

Configure Switching

163

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Status.

The Querier VLAN Status page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure MLD Snooping

In IPv4, Layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping to limit the flooding of multicast traffic by

dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that multicast traffic is forwarded to only those

interfaces associated with IP multicast address. In IPv6, MLD snooping performs a similar

function. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports

that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN. This list is

constructed by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.

MLD Snooping Overview

Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a protocol used by IPv6 multicast routers to discover

the presence of multicast listeners (nodes that must receive IPv6 multicast packets) on its

directly attached links and to discover which multicast packets are of interest to neighboring

Table 44. Querier VLAN Status information

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping querier is enabled.

Operational State The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in

any of the following states:

• Querier. The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping

switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the

configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better

querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier. The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN.

If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves

into querier mode.

• Disabled. The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The

snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not

operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured

or the network management address is also not configured.

Operational Version The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was

snooped on the VLAN.

Operational Max Response Time The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the

snooping querier.

Configure Switching

164

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

nodes. MLD is derived from IGMP; MLD version 1 (MLDv1) is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLD

version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD is a subprotocol of Internet Control

Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), and MLD messages are a subset of ICMPv6

messages, identified in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next Header value of 58.

The switch can snoop on both MLDv1 and MLDv2 protocol packets and bridge IPv6 multicast

data based on destination IPv6 Multicast MAC Addresses. The switch can be configured to

perform MLD snooping and IGMP snooping simultaneously.

In addition to building and maintaining lists of multicast group memberships, the MLD

snooping switch also maintains a list of multicast routers. Multicast packets are forwarded on

ports to which multicast routers are connected. With MLD snooping, only one querier can be

active in the network. All other routers in the network are suppressed and are not detectable

by the switch. If a query is not received on an interface within a specified period, the interface

is removed from the list of interfaces to which multicast routers are attached. However, by

default, the multicast router expiration time is zero, that is, the multicast router does not

expire.

A statically configured router that is connected to an interface or VLAN on the switch is

automatically added to the list with learned multicast routers. The interface must be active or

must be both active and a member of the VLAN.

Enable MLD Snooping

You can enable MLD snooping.

To enable MLD snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Configuration page displays.

6. Select the MLD Snooping Admin Mode Enable radio button.

By default, the Enable radio button is selected.

Configure Switching

165

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.

Configure an MLD Snooping Interface

To configure an MLD snooping interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

Table 45. MLD Snooping Configuration information

Field Definition

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that were processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for MLD

Snooping The interfaces on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled. MLD

snooping must be enabled globally and on an interface for the interface to

be able to snoop MLD packets to determine which segments must receive

multicast packets directed to the group address.

VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD

Snooping The VLANs on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled.

Configure Switching

166

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the interface mode for the

selected interface for MLD snooping for the switch.

The default is Disable.

9. In the Membership Interval field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a

particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than the

maximum response time. The default is 260 seconds.

10. In the Max Response T ime in seconds field, specify the time that the switch must wait after

sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on

that interface.

Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

11. In the Expiration Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query on

an interface before removing the interface from the list of interfaces with multicast routers

attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

12. From the Fast Leave menu, select to enable or disable Fast Leave on the interface.

If Fast Leave is enabled, the interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2

forwarding table when the switch receives an MLD leave message for a multicast group

without first sending MAC-based general queries. The default is Disable.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure MLD Snooping for VLANs

To configure MLD snooping for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure Switching

167

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping must be enabled.

7. From the Fast Leave menu, select to enable or disable the MLD snooping Fast Leave

mode for the specified VLAN ID.

8. In the Membership Interval field, set the value for the group membership interval of MLD

snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600.

9. In the Maximum Response Time field, set the value for the maximum response time of

MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval –1. This value must be less than the

group membership interval value.

10. In the Multicast Router Expiry Time field, set the value for the multicast router expiry time

of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 0 to 3600.

11. Click the Add button.

MLD snooping is enabled on the specified VLAN.

Remove MLD Snooping From a VLAN

You can remove MLD snooping from a VLAN.

To remove MLD snooping from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

Configure Switching

168

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the VLAN ID.

7. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. MLD snooping is no longer supported on the VLAN. The VLAN

itself is not deleted.

Configure a Multicast Router Interface for MLD Snooping

To configure a multicast router interface for MLD snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

The Multicast Router Configuration page displays.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Multicast Router menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the

selected interfaces.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Switching

169

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN for MLD Snooping

To configure a multicast router VLAN for MLD snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration.

The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want the multicast router to be

enabled.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID.

8. From the Multicast Router menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the

VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an MLD Snooping Querier

You can configure the settings for an MLD snooping querier.

To configure an MLD snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure Switching

170

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Querier Configuration page displays.

6. Configure the following settings:

•Querier Admin Mode. Enable or disable MLD snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

•Querier Address. Enter an IP address. This specifies the snooping querier address

to be used as the source address in periodic MLD queries. This address is used when

no address is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent. The supported

IPv6 formats are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.

•MLD Version. The MLD protocol used in periodic MLD queries is version 1. This

value is not configurable.

•Query Interval (secs). Specify the interval in seconds between periodic queries sent

by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800.

The default value is 60.

•Querier Expiry Interval (secs). Specify the interval in seconds after which the last

querier information is removed. The querier expiry interval must be a value in the

range of 60 to 300. The default value is 60.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The page displays the IDs of the VLANS for which the MLD snooping querier is enabled.

Configure an MLD Snooping Querier for a VLAN

You can configure an MLD snooping querier for use with a VLAN on the network.

To configure an MLD snooping querier for a VLAN

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure Switching

171

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier must be

enabled and for which a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

7. From the Querier Election Participate Mode menu, select to enable or disable the querier

participation election mode for MLD snooping.

When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN,

the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the

snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the

querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

8. In the Querier VLAN Address field, specify the snooping querier address to be used as the

source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.

9. Click the Add button.

Your settings are saved and the MLD snooping querier is added on the VLAN.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 46. MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Operational State The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the

following states:

• Querier. Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends

out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query

interval. If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to

non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier. Snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the querier

expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.

• Disabled. Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier

moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the VLAN or

when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is

also not configured.

Operational Version The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Operational Max

Response T ime The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping

querier.

Configure Switching

172

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Remove an MLD Snooping Querier From a VLAN

You can remove an MLD snooping querier from a VLAN.

To remove an MLD snooping querier from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the VLAN ID.

7. Click the Delete button.

Your settings are saved. The MLD snooping querier is no longer supported on the VLAN.

The VLAN itself is not deleted.

View, Search, and Configure the MAC Address Table

You can view or configure the MAC address table. This table contains information about

unicast entries for which the switch holds forwarding or filtering information. The transparent

bridging function uses the forwarding database entries to determine how to forward an

incoming frame.

View and Search the MAC Address Table

You can use the search function for the MAC address table to display information about the

entries in the table.

To view and search the MAC address table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Configure Switching

173

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Basic > Address Table.

The MAC Address Table page displays.

6. Use the Search menu and field to search for a MAC address, VLAN ID, or interface number

and display the information:

•Search by MAC Address. From the Search menu, select MAC Address, and enter

the 6-byte hexadecimal MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for

example, 01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the

remaining (higher) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.

•Search by VLAN ID. From the Search menu, select VLAN ID, and enter the VLAN ID,

for example, 100. Then click the Go button.

•Search by Interface. From the Search menu, select Interface, and enter the

interface ID using the respective interface naming convention (for example, g1 or l1).

Then click the Go button.

7. To refresh the information on the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 47. MAC Address Table information

Field Description

Total MAC Address The number of total MAC addresses learned or configured.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding, filtering information, or

both. The format is a 6-byte MAC address that is separated by colons, for example

01:23:45:67:89:AB.

Configure Switching

174

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval

You can set the address aging interval for the specified forwarding database.

To set the address aging interval:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Dynamic Address.

The Dynamic Address page displays.

6. In the Address Aging T imeout (seconds) field, specify the time-out period in seconds for

aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

The value can be any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The default is 300.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Interface The interface on which the address was learned.

Status The status of this entry, which can be one of the following:

• Static. The instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be relearned.

• Learned. The instance was learned, and is being used.

• Management. The value of the corresponding instance for the system MAC

address is also the value of an existing instance for dot1dStaticAddress.

Table 47. MAC Address Table information (continued)

Field Description

Configure Switching

175

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Add a Static MAC Address

You can manually add MAC addresses to the MAC address table. Such MAC addresses are

static MAC addresses.

To add a static MAC address:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

The page displays the Port List section and the Static MAC ADdress Table section.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

7. In the Static MAC Address field, enter the MAC address.

8. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID that must be associated with the MAC

address.

9. Click the Add button.

The static MAC address is added to the MAC address table.

Remove a Static MAC Address

You can manually remove static MAC addresses from the MAC address table.

To add a static MAC address:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

Configure Switching

176

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

The page displays the Port List section and the Static MAC ADdress Table section.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

7. Select the check box for the static MAC address.

You can select multiple MAC addresses.

8. Click the Delete button.

The static MAC address is removed from the MAC address table.

Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection

Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the

performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.

The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection

per port or globally.

If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined PDU packets to a Layer 2 multicast

destination address (09:00:09:09:13:A6) on all ports for which the feature is enabled. You can

selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on specific ports even while

port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with the previously mentioned

multicast destination address, the source MAC address in the packet is compared with the

MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match, the packet is forwarded to all

ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other multicast packet. The packet is

not forwarded to the port from which it was received.

If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform

one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:

•The port is shut down.

•A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be

sent to the syslog server.)

•The port is shut down and a log message is generated.

If loop protection is disabled, the multicast packet is silently dropped.

Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware

switches. It is intended for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree BPDUs. Loop

protection detects physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device. You must

Configure Switching

177

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

enable loop protection globally before you can enable and configure it at the interface level.

Loop protection is supported on physical interfaces and static LAG interfaces, but not on

dynamic LAG interfaces.

Configure Global Layer 2 Loop Protection

To configure global Layer 2 loop protection:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

6. To enable or disable loop protection, select the Admin Mode Enable or Disable radio

button.

The default is Enable.

7. From the Transmit Interval menu, select the time in seconds between transmission of loop

packets.

The default transmit interval is 5 seconds.

8. From the Max PDU Receive menu, select the maximum number of packets to be received

before an action is taken.

The default is 1.

9. In the Disable Timer field, enter the time in seconds after which a port is disabled when a

loop is detected.

Configure Switching

178

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The range is from 0 to 604800 seconds. The default is 0 seconds.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection on a Port

To configure Layer 2 loop protection on a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

6. Use one of the following methods to narrow down the ports that are displayed:

•To display all the physical ports, click the 1 link.

•To display all LAGs only, click the LAG link.

Configure Switching

179

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

•In the Go To Port field, type the port number, for example g18, and click the Go

button.

7. In the Port field, select the port for which data is to be displayed or configured.

8. From the Keep Alive menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether keep-alives are

enabled on an interface.

The default is Disable.

9. From the RX Action menu, select the action that occurs when the switch detects a loop on

an interface:

•Log. The switch logs a message.

•Disable. The switch disables the interface. This is the default action.

•Both. The switch both logs a message and disables the interface.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. To show the latest information on the page, click the Refresh button.

12. To clear all the statistics in the table, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 48. L2 Loop Protection Interface Information

Field Description

Loop Detected Shows whether a loop is detected on the interface. If the interface is

disabled and then reenabled, the status changes back to No.

Loop Count The number of packets that were received after the loop was detected.

Time Since Last Loop The time that elapsed since the loop was detected.

Port Status The status of the interface (Enabled, Disabled, or D-Disabled, which stands

for diagnostically disabled).

Configure Switching

180

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

181

4. Configuring Routing

This chapter covers the following topics.

•How the Switch Handles Routing

•Enable the Routing Mode

•View the IP Statistics

•Configure IPv6 Routing

•Configure Router Discovery

•Configure Routes and View Routes

•Configure ARP

Configuring Routing

182

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

How the Switch Handles Routing

For each incoming packet, the switch uses the destination MAC address to determine if the

address matches a configured routing interface. If it does, the switch searches the host table

for a matching destination IP address:

•The host table contains a matching IP address.The packet is routed to the host.

•The host table does not contain a matching IP address. The switch searches for the

longest prefix match on the destination IP address:

-A match occurs. The packet is routed to the next hop.

-No match occurs but a default route exists. The packet is routed to the next hop

that is specified in the default route.

-No match occurs and no default route exists. The packet is dropped.

The routing table can include entries that were manually added. The host table can include

entries that were manually added or dynamically added through ARP.

Enable the Routing Mode

By default, the routing mode is disabled on the switch. You can enable the routing mode to let

the switch route traffic through its interfaces.

You can also enable routing for a VLAN interface (see Configure Routing VLANs on

page 204) and use the VLAN routing wizard to create a VLAN routing interface (see

Configure VLAN Routing With the VLAN Routing Wizard on page 204).

To enable routing on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > IP > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

Configuring Routing

183

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. Select the Routing Mode Enable radio button.

7. Click the Apply button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

View the IP Statistics

The IP Statistics page displays the IP statistics conform RFC 1213.

To display the IP statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > IP > Statistics.

The IP Statistics page displays.

Table 49. IP Configuration information

Field Description

Default Time to Live The default value that is inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of

datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport

layer protocol. The default value is 64.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. The default value is 1.

Configuring Routing

184

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 50. IP routing statistics information

Field Description

IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those

received in error.

IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because of errors in IP headers,

including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors,

time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so

on.

IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in the IP

header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity.

This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of

unsupported classes (for example, Class E). For entities that are not IP

gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes

datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.

IpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not the final IP

destination, which caused the switch to attempt to forward them to the final

destination. In entities that do not act as IP gateways, this counter includes only

those packets that were source-routed via this entity, and the source-route

option processing was successful.

IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded

because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to

prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for

lack of buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded

while awaiting reassembly.

IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols

(including ICMP).

IpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user-protocols (including ICMP)

supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include any

datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to

prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (for

example, for lack of buffer space). This counter includes datagrams counted in

ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion.

IpOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to

transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in

ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion. This includes any datagrams

that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.

IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they

are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

IpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this

entity.

IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

Configuring Routing

185

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for example,

because of timing out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of

discarded IP fragments because some algorithms can lose track of the number

of fragments by combining them as they are received.

IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that were successfully fragmented at this entity.

IpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be

fragmented at this entity but could not be, for example, because their Don’t

Fragment flag was set.

IpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of

fragmentation at this entity.

IpRoutingDiscards The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they were valid.

One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free buffer space

for other routing entries.

IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter

includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but that included

ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.

IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.

IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.

IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.

IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send. This

counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send because of

problems discovered within ICMP, such as a lack of buffers. This value does not

include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer, such as the inability of IP to

route the resulting datagram.

IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

Table 50. IP routing statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Configuring Routing

186

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure IPv6 Routing

Note: IPv6 is supported on VLAN interfaces only, not on physical ports.

Configure the IPv6 Global Routing Settings

You can configure IPv6 the global routing settings for the switch (as opposed to the IPv6

settings for an interface).

To configure the IPv6 global routing settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration.

IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.

IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. Because hosts do not send

redirects, this counter is always zero for a host.

IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages.

IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.

IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.

Table 50. IP routing statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Configuring Routing

187

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The IPv6 Global Configuration page displays.

6. To globally enable IPv6 unicast routing, select the IPv6 Unicast Routing Enable radio button.

By default, IPv6 unicast routing is disabled and the Disable radio button is selected.

7. In the Hop Limit field, enter the number for the unicast hop count that is used in IPv6

packets that originate in the switch.

The value is also included in router advertisements. The valid values for hops are 1

through 255. The default is 64.

8. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval field, enter the number of ICMP error packets that

are allowed per burst interval.

This value controls the ICMPv6 error packets. The default rate limit is 100 packets per

second, meaning that the burst interval is 1000 mseconds. To disable ICMP rate limiting,

enter 0. The valid rate interval must be in the range from 0 to 2147483647 mseconds.

9. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size field, enter the number of ICMP error packets that are

allowed per burst interval.

This value controls the ICMP error packets. The default burst size is 100 packets. The

valid burst size is 1 to 200. (Do not enter 0.)

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IPv6 Route Table

To view the IPv6 Route Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

The IPv6 Routing Table page displays.

6. From the Routes Displayed menu, select one of the following options:

Configuring Routing

188

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•All Routes. Show all active IPv6 routes.

•Best Routes Only. Show only the best active routes.

•Configured Routes Only. Show only the manually configured routes.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings

For you to be able to configure IPv6 VLAN interface setting, IPv6 must be configured for the

network interface, IPv6 global routing must be enabled, and a routing VLAN must exist. For

more information, see the following sections:

•Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface on page 38

•Configure the IPv6 Global Routing Settings on page 186

•Configure Routing VLANs on page 204.

IPv6 is supported on VLAN interfaces only, not on physical ports.

Configure IPv6 VLAN interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 51. IPv6 Route Table information

Field Description

Number of Routes The total number of active routes in the route table.

IPv6 Prefix The network prefix for the active route.

Prefix Length The prefix length for the active route.

Protocol The type of protocol for the active route.

Next Hop Interface The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next

hop would be a Null0 interface.

Next Hop IP Address The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

Preference The route preference of the configured route.

Configuring Routing

189

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

The IPv6 Global Configuration page displays.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the IPv6 Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global

address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is used. The default value is

Disable.

8. From the DHCPv6 Client Mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client mode

on an interface.

Only one interface can function as a client. The default value is Disable.

9. From the Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode menu, select to enable or disable the

stateless address autoconfiguration mode on an interface.

The default value is Disable.

10. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the IPv6 mode.

The default is Disable. When the IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6

operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is

used.

11. In the MTU field, specify the maximum transmit unit (MTU) for an interface.

If the value is 0, then this interface is not enabled for routing. It is not valid to set this value

to 0 if routing is enabled. The MTU range 1280 to 9198. The default is 1800.

12. In the Duplicate Address Detection Transmits field, specify the number of duplicate

address detection (DAD) transmits on an interface.

The DAD transmits value must be in the range 0 to 600. The default is 1.

13. In the Life Time Interval field, specify the router advertisement life time interval that is sent

from the interface.

This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval.

0 means do not use the VLAN interface as the default routing interface. The range of

router life time is 0 to 9000. The default is 1800.

Configuring Routing

190

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

14. In the Adv NS Interval field, specify the retransmission time of router advertisements that

are sent from the interface.

A value of 0 means the interval is not specified. The range of the neighbor solicit interval

is 1000 to 4294967295. The default is 0.

15. In the Adv Reachable Interval field, specify the router advertisement time.

This is the time allocated to consider the neighbors reachable after ND confirmation. The

range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000. The default is 0.

16. Use the Adv Interval field to specify the maximum time allowed between sending router

advertisements from the interface.

The range of the maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800. The default value is 600.

17. From the Adv Managed Config Flag menu, specify the setting for the router advertisement

managed address configuration flag.

When the selection is Enable, end nodes use DHCPv6. When the selection is Disable,

end nodes autoconfigure addresses. The default value is Disable.

18. From the Adv Other Config Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router

advertisement other stateful configuration flag.

The default value is Disable.

19. From the Router Preference menu, specify the router preference advertisement on an

interface.

The default value is Medium.

20. From the Adv Suppress Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router advertisement

suppression on an interface.

The default value is Disable.

21. From the Destination Unreachables menu, select to enable or disable the mode for

sending ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages on this interface.

If this mode is disabled, the interface does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachable

messages. The default value is Enable.

22. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 52. IPv6 VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Routing Mode Displays the routing mode of an interface. The default is Disable.

Operational Mode Specifies the operational state of an interface. The default value is

Disable.

Link State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configuring Routing

191

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Manage IPv6 Prefixes for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN

When you add an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN, the prefix is advertised on

all interfaces that are members of the VLAN. You can change and remove existing IPv6

prefixes.

Add an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN

To add an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface to be configured.

When the selection is changed, the page refreshes, causing all fields to be updated for

the newly selected interface.

7. In the Ipv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for an interface.

8. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for an interface.

9. From the EUI64 menu, select Enable or Disable to indicate whether the specified 64-bit

unicast prefix is enabled.

10. In the Valid Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

This is the time allowed to consider the prefix valid for the purpose of on-link

determination. The valid life time is 0 to 4294967295.

11. In the Preferred Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time

must be in the range 0 to 4294967295.

Configuring Routing

192

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

12. From the Onlink Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the selected

prefix can be used for on-link determination.

The default is Enable.

13. From the Autonomous Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration.

The default value is Enable.

The Current State field displays the state of the IPV6 address. The state is TENT if routing

is disabled or DAD fails. The state is Active if the interface is active and DAD is

successful.

14. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address prefix is added to the interface.

Change the Settings for an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on

an IPv6 VLAN

You can change the settings for a prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN.

To change the settings for an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. Select the check box for the IPv6 prefix.

The settings display in the fields in the table heading.

8. Change the settings as needed.

Configuring Routing

193

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an IPv6 Prefix From an IPv6 VLAN

You can remove one or more IPv6 prefixes from an IPv6 VLAN. You cannot remove the

default IPv6 prefix.

To remove one or more IPv6 prefixes from an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. Select the check boxes for the IPv6 prefixes.

8. Click the Delete button.

The IPv6 prefixes are removed from the IPv6 VLAN.

View IPv6 Statistics

To display the IPv6 statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

Configuring Routing

194

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Statistics.

The IPv6 Statistics page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

When the selection is changed, the page refreshes, causing all fields to be updated for

the newly selected interface.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 53. IPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Total Datagrams Received The total number of input datagrams received by the interface, including

those received in error.

Received Datagrams Locally

Delivered The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6

user-protocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the

interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be

the input interface for some of the datagrams.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To Header Errors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6

headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop

count exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and

so on.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To MTU The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their

size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To No Route The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be

found to transmit them to their destination.

Received Datagrams With Unknown

Protocol The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter

is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To Invalid Address The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in

their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received

at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and

unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes).

For entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward

datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the

destination address was not a local address.

Configuring Routing

195

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To T runcated Data The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame did

not carry enough data.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Other The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were

discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not

include any datagrams discarded while awaiting reassembly.

Received Datagrams Reassembly

Required The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled at

this interface. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these

fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for

some of the fragments.

Datagrams Successfully

Reassembled The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is

incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the

fragments.

Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the

algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by

combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the

interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be

the input interface for some of the fragments.

Datagrams Forwarded The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to

their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this

counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this

entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully

forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.

Datagrams Locally T ransmitted The number of datagrams that this entity successfully transmitted from this

output interface.

Datagrams Transmit Failed The number of datagrams that this entity failed to transmit successfully.

Datagrams Successfully

Fragmented The number of IPv6 datagrams that were fragmented at this output

interface.

Datagrams Failed To Fragment The number of output datagrams that could not be fragmented at this

interface.

Datagrams Fragments Created The number of output datagram fragments that were generated as a result

of fragmentation at this output interface.

Multicast Datagrams Received The number of multicast packets received by the interface.

Multicast Datagrams Transmitted The number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface.

Table 53. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Configuring Routing

196

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the nonconfigurable ICMPv6 information displayed on the

page.

Table 54. ICMPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Total ICMPv6 Messages Received The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface, which

includes all those counted by IPv6IfIcmpInErrors. This interface is the

interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed, which might not

be the input interface for the messages.

ICMPv6 Messages With Errors

Received The number of ICMP messages that the interface received but determined

as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so

on).

ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable

Messages Received The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited

Administratively Received The number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication

administratively prohibited messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages

Received The number of ICMP T ime Exceeded messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Parameter Problem

Messages Received The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages

Received The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages

Received The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages

Received The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages

Received The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Advertisement

Messages Received The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages

Received The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement

Messages Received The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Redirect Messages

Received The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Query

Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received by

the interface.

ICMPv6 Group Membership

Response Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received

by the interface.

Configuring Routing

197

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

ICMPv6 Group Membership

Reduction Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received

by the interface.

Total ICMPv6 Messages

Transmitted The total number of ICMP messages that this interface attempted to send.

This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted

Due To Error The number of ICMP messages that this interface did not send due to

problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value

does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the

inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations

there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable

Messages T ransmitted The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited

Administratively T ransmitted Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable/Communication

Administratively Prohibited messages sent.

ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages

Transmitted The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Parameter Problem

Messages T ransmitted The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages

Transmitted The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages

Transmitted The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages

Transmitted The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages

Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Router Advertisement

Messages T ransmitted The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages

Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement

Messages T ransmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the

interface.

ICMPv6 Redirect Messages

Transmitted The number of Redirect messages sent.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Query

Messages T ransmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.

ICMPv6 Group Membership

Response Messages Transmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.

Table 54. ICMPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Configuring Routing

198

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View the IPv6 Neighbor Table

To view or clear the IPv6 Neighbor Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table.

The IPv6 Neighbor Table page displays.

6. Use the Search menu and field to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 address or interface

number:

•Search by IPv6 address. Select IPv6 Address from the Search menu. Enter the

128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups separated by colons, for

example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

•Search by Interface. Select Interface from the Search menu. Enter the interface

using the respective naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the Go

button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed.

7. To clear the IPv6 neighbors on a selected interface or on all interfaces, click the Clear

button.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

ICMPv6 Group Membership

Reduction Messages Transmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.

ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects The number of duplicate addresses detected by the interface.

Table 54. ICMPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Configuring Routing

199

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Manage Static IPv6 Routes

You can configure static and default routes with a single next hop to any destination. You can

also delete an individual next hop from a static route or an entire static route.

The switch supports a maximum of 32 static routes. The cost of a static route is always 0.

On the switch, routing provides a preference option for the configuration of default routes. A

configured default route is treated exactly a a static route. Therefore, default routes and static

routes contain the same default preference.

The platform supports up to 16 IPv6 static routes and up to 16 VLAN routing interfaces. The

network ports are logical management interfaces. The IP stack’s routing table contains both

Table 55. IPv6 Neighbor Table information

Field Description

Interface The interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row.

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with an interface.

isRtr Indicates whether the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the

value is True. If the neighbor is not a router, the value is False.

Neighbor State The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for

dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:

• Incmp. Address resolution is being performed on the entry. A

neighbor solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast

address of the target, but the corresponding neighbor advertisement

message is not yet received.

• Reach. Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable

Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was

functioning properly. While in REACH state, the device takes no

special action as packets are sent.

• Stale. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last

positive confirmation was received that the forward path was

functioning properly. While in STALE state, the device takes no action

until a packet is sent.

• Delay. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last

positive confirmation was received that the forward path was

functioning properly. A packet was sent within the last

DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability

confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME

seconds of entering the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation

message and change the state to PROBE.

• Probe. Seeks a reachability confirmation by resending neighbor

solicitation messages every Retrans Timer milliseconds until a

reachability confirmation is received.

Last Updated Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.

Configuring Routing

200

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

IPv6 routes associated with these management interfaces and IPv6 routes associated with

routing interfaces. Configuration of 127-bit IPv6 prefixes on the routing/host IPv6 interfaces is

supported. You can distinguishes between static routes by specifying a route preference

value. A static route with a lower preference value is a more preferred static route. On a

VLAN routing interface, for example, vlan 10), you can enable IPv4 routing and IPv6 routing

independently.

Add a Static IPV6 Route

To add a static IPv6 route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

6. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 network prefix for the configured route.

7. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for the configured route.

8. From the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu, select one of the following options:

•Global. Select this option if the IPv6 address is a global IPv6 address.

•Link-Local. Select this option if the next hop IPv6 address is a link-local IPv6

address. You must specify a next hop IPv6 address in the Next Hop IPv6 Address

field.

•Static-Reject. Select this option to create a static-reject route for a destination prefix.

You do not need to specify a next hop IPv6 address.

9. If the selection from the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu is Global or Link-Local, enter

the next hop IPv6 address in the Next Hop IPv6 Address field.

10. If the selection from the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu is Link-Local, from the

Interface menu, select the interface that connects to the IPv6 next hop.

11. In the Preference field, specify the router preference.

Configuring Routing

201

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

12. Click the Add button.

The route is added.

Change the Preference for a Static IPv6 Route

To change the preference for a static IPv6 route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

6. Select the check box for the static IPv6 route.

7. In the Preference field, specify another router preference.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove Static IPv6 Routes

To remove one or more static IPv6 routes:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configuring Routing

202

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

6. Select one or more check boxes for static IPv6 routes.

7. Click the Delete button.

The route or routes are removed from the switch.

View the IPv6 Route Table

To view the IPv6 Route Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Table.

The IPv6 Route Table displays.

6. From the Routes Displayed menu, select one of the following options:

•All Routes. Show all active IPv6 routes.

•Best Routes Only. Show only the best active routes.

•Configured Routes Only. Show only the manually configured routes.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

Configuring Routing

203

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure IPv6 Route Preferences

You can configure the default preference for each protocol. These values are arbitrary values

in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a

route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other

protocol. The switch selects the route with the lowest preference value as the best route to a

destination. When multiple routes to a destination exist, the preference values are used to

determine the preferred route. If these preference values routes are equal, the route with the

best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics, you must configure

different preference values for each of the protocols.

Configure the IPv6 route preferences:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Preference.

Table 56. IPv6v Route Table information

Field Description

Number of Routes The total number of active routes in the route table.

IPv6 Prefix The network prefix for the active route.

Prefix Length The prefix length for the active route.

Protocol The type of protocol for the active route.

Next Hop Interface The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next

hop would be a Null0 interface.

Next Hop IP Address The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

Preference The route preference of the configured route.

Configuring Routing

204

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The IPv6 Route Preference page displays.

6. In the Static field, specify the static route preference value for the switch.

The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 1.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Local field displays the local preference.

Configure Routing VLANs

You can configure the switch software with some ports supporting VLANs and some

supporting routing. You can also configure the software to allow traffic on a VLAN to be

treated as if the VLAN were a router port.

When a port is enabled for bridging (default) rather than routing, all normal bridge processing

is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its MAC

Destination Address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address table. If

routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that of the

internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet is

forwarded to all ports in the VLAN, plus the internal bridge-router interface, if it was received

on a routed VLAN.

Since a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be

enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. VLAN Routing can be used to allow

more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. It could also be used when a

VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or when additional segmentation or security is

required. This section shows how to configure switch software to support VLAN routing. A

port can be either a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN port can be

part of a VLAN that is itself a router port.

Configure VLAN Routing With the VLAN Routing Wizard

The VLAN Routing Wizard creates a VLAN routing interface, configure the IP address and

subnet mask for the interface, and add selected ports or LAGs to the VLAN. With this wizard,

you can:

•Create a VLAN.

•Add selected ports to the newly created VLAN and remove selected ports from the default

VLAN.

•Optionally, you can create a LAG, add selected ports to a LAG, then add the LAG to the

newly created VLAN.

•Enable tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN. Disable tagging if a

selected port does not exist in another VLAN.

•Exclude ports not selected from the VLAN.

•Enable routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered.

Configuring Routing

205

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To configure VLAN routing using the VLAN routing wizard:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Wizard.

The following figure show the page for models GC728X and GC728XP. Models GC752X

and GC752XP support 48 Ethernet ports but the same number of LAGs (24).

6. In the Vlan ID field, specify the VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with this VLAN. The VID is

1 to 4093 characters in length.

7. In the IP Address field, define the IP address of the VLAN interface.

8. In the Network Mask field, define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.

Configuring Routing

206

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

9. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

•T (T agged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN.

10. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

•T (Tagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manually Manage Routing VLANs

You can view information about existing VLAN routing interfaces on the switch, change the

settings for an existing routing VLAN, change a regular VLAN into a routing VLAN, and delete

a routing VLAN.

View the Existing Routing VLANs and Manually Add a Routing VLAN

You can view the routing VLANs that you added through the VLAN Routing Wizard and

manually add a routing VLAN. You do so by changing a regular VLAN that already exists on

the switch into a routing VLAN.

To view the exiting routing VLANs or manually add a routing VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

Configuring Routing

207

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays. The table displays any existing routing

VLANs.

6. To add a routing VLAN by changing a regular VLAN into a routing VLAN, do the following:

a. From the VLAN menu, select the VLAN that you want to configure for VLAN routing.

The VLAN menu display all IDs of the VLANs that are configured on the switch.

b. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address for the VLAN routing interface.

c. In the Subnet Mask field, enter a subnet mask for the VLAN routing interface.

d. In the IP MTU field, specify the maximum size of IP packets sent on an interface.

A valid range is from 68 bytes to the link MTU. The default value is 1500. A value of 0

specifies that the value in the IP MTU must be ignored. In that situation, the VLAN

interface uses the link MTU as the IP MTU. The link MTU is the maximum frame size

minus the length of the layer 2 header.

e. Click the Add button.

The VLAN becomes a routing VLAN.

The following table describes the VLAN routing interface status information on the page.

Change an Existing Routing VLAN

To change the settings for an existing routing VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 57. VLAN routing interface information

Field Description

Port The port number assigned to the VLAN Routing Interface.

MAC Address The MAC Address assigned to the VLAN Routing Interface.

Routing Mode Shows whether the routing mode is enabled (Enable or Disable).

Configuring Routing

208

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN list, select the VLAN.

7. Change the settings as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a Routing VLAN

When you remove a routing VLAN, the VLAN becomes a regular VLAN.

To remove a routing VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN list, select the VLAN.

7. Click the Delete button.

The routing VLAN is removed and the VLAN becomes a regular VLAN.

Configuring Routing

209

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure Router Discovery

The Router Discovery protocol is used by hosts to identify operational routers (or routing

interfaces) on the subnet. Router discovery messages can be of two types: router

advertisements and router solicitations. The protocol requires each router to periodically

advertise the IP addresses that it is associated with. Hosts listen for these advertisements

and discover the IP addresses of neighboring routers.

To configure the router discovery parameters:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > Router Discovery.

The Router Discovery Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the routing interface.

To configure all routing interfaces, select the check box in the heading row . To configure a

single interface, select the check box associated with the interface. The interface number

displays in the Interface field in the table heading row.

7. From the Advertise Mode menu, select Enable.

Router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.

8. In the Advertise Address field. specify the IP address to be used to advertise the switch.

9. In the Maximum Advertise Interval field, specify the maximum time (in seconds) allowed

between router advertisements sent from the interface.

The default is 600 seconds.

10. In the Minimum Advertise Interval field, specify the minimum time (in seconds) allowed

between router advertisements sent from the interface.

The default is 450 seconds.

Configuring Routing

210

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

11. In the Advertise Lifetime field, specify the value (in seconds) to be used as the lifetime field

in router advertisements sent from the interface.

This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as

valid router addresses by hosts. The default is 1800 seconds.

12. In the Preference Level field, specify the preference level of the router as a default router

relative to other routers on the same subnet.

Higher numbered addresses are preferred. The default is 0.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Routes and View Routes

You can configure static and default routes and view the routes that the switch learned.

To configure a static or default route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays. The page also shows the Route Status section.

6. From the Route Type menu, select one of the following types of routes:

•Static. For a static route, you must specify all fields.

•DefaultRoute. For a default route, you cannot specify the Network Address and

Subnet Mask fields.

7. For a static route only, in the Network Address field, specify the IP route prefix for the

destination.

To create a route, a valid routing interface must exist, and the next hop IP Address must

be on the same network as the routing interface.

Configuring Routing

211

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

8. For a static route only, in the Subnet Mask field, specify the subnet mask.

Also referred to as the network mask, the mask indicates the portion of the IP address

that identifies the attached network.

9. In the Next Hop IP Address field, specify the next hop IP address.

This is the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if

any) in the path towards the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent

neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network. When

creating a route, the next hop IP must be on the same network as the routing interface.

Valid next hop IP addresses are listed in the Route Status table.

10. In the Preference field, specify the preference value for the route.

Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the

route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route,

you can control whether a static route is more preferred or less preferred. The preference

also controls whether a static route is more preferred or less preferred than other static

routes to the same destination.

11. As an option, in the Description field, specify a description to help identify the route.

12. Click the Add button.

The route is added.

The Route Status table provides information about the static routes that you manually

configured on the switch and the routes the switch learned dynamically.

Table 58. Routing table information

Field Description

Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination.

Subnet Mask Also referred to as the network mask, the portion of the IP interface address that

identifies the attached network.

Protocol The protocol that created the route. The protocol can be Local or Static.

Route Type Based on the protocol, Connected, Static, or Dynamic.

Next Hop Interface The outgoing router interface that must be used when the switch forwards traffic

to the destination.

Next Hop IP Address The outgoing router IP address that must be used when the switch forwards

traffic to the next router (if any) in the path towards the destination. The next

router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

Preference A value from 1 to 255.

Metric The administrative cost of the path to the destination.

Configuring Routing

212

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Delete Routes

To delete one or more static routes:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays. The page also shows the Route Status section.

6. Select the check box next to each route to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The static route is deleted.

Configure ARP

The address resolution protocol (ARP) associates a layer 2 MAC address with a layer 3 IPv4

address. The switch support both dynamic and manual ARP configuration. With manual ARP

configuration, you can statically add entries into the ARP table.

ARP is a required part of the Internet protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP address to a

media (MAC) address, defined by a local area network (LAN) such as an Ethernet network.

A device that must send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or if

the destination is not on the same subnet, of the next hop router. The device achieves this by

broadcasting an ARP request packet, to which the intended recipient responds by sending an

ARP unicast reply that contains its MAC address. Once learned, the MAC address is used in

the destination address field of the Layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet.

The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each device on the network. ARP cache

entries are learned by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields,

regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response. In this way, when an ARP request is

broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or virtual LAN (VLAN), each recipient can store

the sender’s IP address and MAC address in its ARP cache. The ARP response, which is a

unicast reply, is normally detected only by the device that sends the ARP request. That

Configuring Routing

213

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

device stores the sender’s information in its ARP cache. Newer information always replaces

existing content in the ARP cache.

If you move a device in the network, the device’s MAC address can become associated with

another IP address. Or if you reconfigure, disconnect, or power off the device, the device’ s IP

address can disappear from the network altogether. To prevent such situations from causing

information in the ARP cache to become outdated, each device on the network periodically

updates the entries in its ARP cache with new information from the network. On the switch,

you can set the ageout interval for ARP entries from 15 to 21600 seconds. When the ageout

interval is reached, ARP entries for which the switch did not receive an ARP reply are

removed form the switch ARP cache.

The switch supports 512 ARP entries, which include dynamic and static ARP entries.

To configure and display ARP details, see the following sections:

•View Entries in the ARP Cache on page 213

•Create a Static ARP Entry on page 214

•Configure the Global ARP Settings on page 215

•Remove ARP Entries From the ARP Cache on page 216

View Entries in the ARP Cache

You can view entries in the ARP table.

To display entries in the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > ARP > Basic > ARP Cache.

The Management VLAN ARP Cache page displays. The page also shows the Routing

VLANs ARP Cache section.

Configuring Routing

214

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The following table provides information included in the management VLAN ARP cache

section.

The following table provides information included in the routing VLANs ARP cache section.

Create a Static ARP Entry

You can add a static entry to the ARP table.

To add an entry to the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 59. ARP cache information

Field Description

IP Address The associated IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the

switch’s existing routing interfaces.

Port The associated interface of the connection.

MAC Address The MAC address of the device.

Table 60. ARP cache information for routing VLANs

Field Description

IP Address The associated IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's

existing routing interfaces.

Interface The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device.

Type The type of the ARP entry. Possible values are:

• Local. An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s MAC

addresses.

• Gateway. A dynamic ARP entry for which the IP address is that of a router.

• Static. An ARP entry configured by the user.

• Dynamic. An ARP entry which was learned by the switch

Age Age since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP Table. The format is hh:mm:ss.

Configuring Routing

215

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > ARP > Advanced > ARP Create.

The Static ARP Configuration page displays. The page also shows the Routing VLANs

ARP Cache section.

6. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address to add.

The address must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the

switch’s existing routing interfaces.

7. In the MAC Address field, specify the unicast MAC address of the device.

The format is six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:06:29:32:81:40.

8. Click the Add button.

The entry is added to the table.

For information about the information in the Routing VLANs ARP Cache table, see Table 60,

ARP cache information for routing VLANs on page 214.

Configure the Global ARP Settings

You can display and change the configuration settings for the ARP table.

To display or change the setting for the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > ARP > Advanced > Global ARP Configuration.

The Global ARP Configuration page displays.

Configuring Routing

216

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. In the Age Time field, specify the number of seconds for an ARP entry to age out.

7. In the Response Time field, specify the number of seconds that the switch must wait for a

response to an ARP request.

8. In the Retries field, specify the maximum number of times that the switch retries an ARP

request.

9. In the Cache Size field, specify the maximum number of entries for the ARP cache.

10. Next to Dynamic Renew, select Enable t o allow the ARP component to automatically

attempt to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove ARP Entries From the ARP Cache

You can remove certain types of entries from the ARP table.

To remove entries from the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > ARP > Advanced > ARP Entry Management.

The ARP Entry Management page displays.

6. From the Remove From Table menu, select the type of ARP entry to be removed.

•All Dynamic Entries

•All Dynamic and Gateway Entries

•Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry

•Specific Static Entry

•None. This is the default selection.

Configuring Routing

217

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

7. If you select Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry or Specific Static Entry from the Remove

From Table menu, enter the IP address of the entry that must be removed from the ARP

table.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

218

5. Configure Quality of Service

In a switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the

attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain

packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for transmission in

a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly the

amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a delay is necessary, packets get held

in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission. As queues become full,

packets can no longer be held for transmission and are dropped by the switch.

Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by

distinguishing packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay.

Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable network.

With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence of at least one

node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path, and the performance of

the entire packet flow is compromised.

This chapter covers the following topics:

•Manage Class of Service

•Manage Differentiated Services

Configure Quality of Service

219

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Manage Class of Service

The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of

switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for dif ferent types of network traf fic

when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an

interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a

mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum

guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user configurable at the queue (or

port) level.

Eight queues per port are supported.

Overview of CoS Configuration

You can set the Class of Service trust mode for an interface. Each port in the switch can be

configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s

priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted mode, it uses a mapping

table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping table indicates the CoS

queue to which the packet must be forwarded on the appropriate egress port. Of course, the

trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use. If this is not the

case, default actions are performed. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific

CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default

priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.

Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet

priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the

ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress

ports, in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is

also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP

packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.

Configure Global CoS Settings

To configure CoS trust mode settings on all interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure Quality of Service

220

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration.

6. Either configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS-configurable interfaces or

configure CoS settings per interface.

The default is Global.

•To configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS configurable interfaces, do

the following:

a. Select the Global radio button.

b. From the Global Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options for ingress traffic on the switch:

-Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

-802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

-DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

•To configure CoS settings per interface, do the following:

a. Select the Interface radio button.

b. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options:

-Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

-802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

-DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Quality of Service

221

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface

You can configure the trust mode for one or more interfaces and apply an interface shaping

rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface.

To configure CoS settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode options for

ingress traffic on the selected interfaces:

•Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

Configure Quality of Service

222

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The

QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal

hardware priority queues. The default value is 802.1p.

•DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated

Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

9. In the Interface Shaping Rate field, specify the maximum allowed bandwidth.

The maximum allowed bandwidth is typically used to shape the outbound transmission

rate. This value is controlled independently of any per-queue maximum bandwidth

configuration. It is effectively a second-level shaping mechanism. The default value is 0,

which means that the maximum is unlimited. You can enter values from 0 to 100 in

increments of 1.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface

You can define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues.

User-configurable parameters control the amount of bandwidth used by the queue, the queue

depth during times of congestion, and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of

all queues on a port. Each port contains its own CoS queue-related configuration.

The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be

configured globally or per port. A global configuration change is automatically applied to all

ports in the system.

To configure CoS queue settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration.

Configure Quality of Service

223

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Queue ID menu, select the queue to be configured.

9. In the Minimum Bandwidth field, specify the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allotted to the

queue.

Setting this value higher than its corresponding maximum bandwidth automatically

increases the maximum to the same value. The default value is 0. The valid range is 0 to

100 in increments of 1. The value 0 means no guaranteed minimum. The sum of the

individual minimum bandwidth values for all queues for the interface cannot exceed the

defined maximum (100).

10. From the Scheduler Type menu, select one of the following options:

•Strict. The interface services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.

•Weighted. The interface uses weighted round robin to associate a weight to each

queue. This is the default setting.

The Queue Management Type field displays the queue depth management technique

that is used for queues on the interface. By default, this method is Taildrop, irrespective of

your selection from the Scheduler Type menu.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues

You can view or change which internal traffic classes are mapped to the 802.1p priority class

values in Ethernet frames that the device receives. The priority-to-traffic class mappings can

be applied globally or per interface. The mapping allows the switch to group various traffic

types (for example, data or voice) based on their latency requirements and give preference to

time-sensitive traffic.

Configure Quality of Service

224

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

To map 802.1p priorities to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping.

6. Select the Global radio button to specify all interfaces (that can be configured for CoS) or

select the Interface radio button to select individual interfaces.

7. In the 802.1p to Queue Mapping table, map each of the eight 802.1p priorities to a queue

(internal traffic class).

The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p

priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (7). For example, traf fic with

a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher

priority, such as 7, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.

The values in the menu under each priority represent the traffic class. The traffic class is

the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue

position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to

be sent.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Quality of Service

225

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Map DSCP Values to Queues

You can map an internal traffic class to a DSCP value.

To map DSCP values to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > DSCP to Queue Mapping.

6. For each DSCP value, select from the corresponding Queue menu which internal traffic

class must be mapped to the DSCP value.

The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a

higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in

higher queues to be sent.

The allowed Per Hop Behavior (PHBs) values, apart from other DSCP experimental

values, are as follows:

•Class Selector (CS) PHB. These values are based on IP precedence.

•Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB. These values define four main levels to sort and

manipulate some flows within the network.

Configure Quality of Service

226

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB. These values are used to prioritize traffic for

real-time applications. In many situations, if the network exceeded traffic and you

need some bandwidth guaranteed for an application, the EF traffic must receive this

rate independently of the intensity of any other traffic attempting to transit the node.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage Differentiated Services

The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be

classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop

behaviors.

Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best

effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although it is not

guaranteed. During times of congestion, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or

dropped. For typical Internet applications, such as email and file transfer , a slight degradation

in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. Conversely, any degradation of

service can negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice or

multimedia.

Overview of Defining DiffServ

To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:

1. Class. Create classes and define class criteria.

2. Policy. Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.

3. Service. Add a policy to an inbound interface.

Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’ s attributes. Policy attributes can be

defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match

occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken

depend on which class matches the packet.

Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet. A policy is applied

to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.

Configure DiffServ Settings

Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria is defined

by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can be defined

on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs.

The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class. Then

one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.

Configure Quality of Service

227

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The All class type option

specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match

that class. The Any class type option specifies that at least one match criteria must evaluate

to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in which they were

added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is

found.

Configure the Global DiffServ Mode

You can display DiffServ general status group information, which includes the current

administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of rows in each of

the main DiffServ private MIB tables.

To configure the global DiffServ mode:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > DiffServ Configuration.

Configure Quality of Service

228

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

6. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:

•Enable. Differentiated services are active. This is the default setting.

•Disable. The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but is not active.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ

Configuration page.

Configure a DiffServ Class

You can add a new DiffServ class name, or rename or delete an existing class. You can also

define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these DiffServ

classes are used to prioritize packets. You can set up multiple match criteria in a class. The

logic is a Boolean logical AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the

Class page.

Create and Configure a DiffServ Class

To create and configure a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 61. DiffServ Status information

Field Description

Class Table The number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch.

Class Rule table The number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy table The number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy Instance table The number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the

switch.

Policy Attributes table The number of configured policy attributes (attached to the policy class instances)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

Service table The number of configured services (attached to the policies on specified interfaces)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

Configure Quality of Service

229

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

6. In the Class Name field, enter a class name.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names, from which you can

select one for modification or deletion. The class name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric

characters in length.

7. From the Class Type menu, select the class type.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are

creating a new class. After the class is created, the Class Type field becomes

nonconfigurable.

8. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

9. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

Configure Quality of Service

230

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

10. Define the criteria that must be associated the DiffServ class:

•Match Every. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

•Reference Class. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After you select the radio

button, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to

reference. A class can reference at most one other class of the same type.

•Class of Service. Select this radio button to require the Class of Service (CoS) value

in an Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the

values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can

be selected.

•VLAN. Select this radio button to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID or a

VLAN ID within a continuous range. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a

packet’s VLAN ID is the same as any VLAN ID within the range. The VLAN value is in

the range of 1–4093.

•Ethernet Type. Select this radio button to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet

frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select the radio

button, specify the EtherType keyword from the list of common protocols that are

mapped to their Ethertype value.

Configure Quality of Service

231

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Source MAC. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source MAC address to

match the specified MAC address. After you select this radio button, use the following

fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:

-Address. The source MAC address to match. The source MAC address is

specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

-Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to

compare against the Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

•Destination MAC. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination MAC

address to match the specified MAC address. After you select the radio button, use

the following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:

-Address. The destination MAC address to match. The destination MAC address

is specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

-Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to

compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

•Protocol T ype. Select this radio button to require a packet’ s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

•Source IP. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source IP address to match

the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to

configure the source IP address match criteria:

-Address. The source IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

-Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

source IP address to use for matching against packet content.

•Source L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to

65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

•Destination IP. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination IP address to

match the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following

fields to configure the destination IP address match criteria:

-Address. The destination IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

-Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.

Configure Quality of Service

232

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Destination L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu.

The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

•IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. The menu includes Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

•Precedence Value. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP precedence

value to match the specified number from 0 to 7, which you must select from the

menu. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

•IP T oS. Select this radio button to require the packet’ s T ype of Service (ToS) bits in the

IP header to match the specified value. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as all 8

bits of the service type octet in the IP header. After you select the radio button, use

the following fields to configure the ToS match criteria:

-Bits V alue. Enter a two-digit hexadecimal number octet value in the range from 00

to ff to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field.

-Bit Mask. Specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP ToS

field in a packet.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class

Summary section at the bottom of the DiffServ Advanced Class Configuration page.

Rename an Existing DiffServ Class

To rename an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

Table 62. DiffServ Class Configuration, Class Summary information

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

Configure Quality of Service

233

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the class name.

7. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Criteria for an Existing DiffServ Class

To change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

7. Change the class configuration as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Quality of Service

234

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Delete a DiffServ Class

To delete a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the class name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure DiffServ IPv6 Class Settings

The IPv6 class configuration feature extends the existing QoS ACL and DiffServ functionality

by providing support for IPv6 packet classification. An Ethernet IPv6 packet is distinguished

from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value, so all IPv6 classifiers include the

Ethertype field. An IPv6 access list serves the same purpose as its IPv4 counterpart.

Before the introduction of the IPv6 class feature, any DiffServ class definition was assumed

to apply to an IPv4 packet. That is, any match item in a class rule was interpreted in the

context of an IPv4 header. An example is a class rule that specifies an L4 port match value.

With the introduction of the IPv6 match capability, you must specify if this class rule is for IPv4

or for IPv6 packets. To facilitate this distinction, a class configuration parameter is added to

specify whether a class applies to IPv4 or IPv6 packet streams.

The destination and source IPv6 addresses use a prefix length value instead of an individual

mask to qualify them as a subnet addresses or a host addresses. The flow label is a 20-bit

number that is unique to an IPv6 packet, used by end stations to signify some form of Quality

of Service (QoS) handling in routers.

Configure Quality of Service

235

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Packets that match an IPv6 classifier are allowed to be marked using only the 802.1p (CoS)

field or the IP DSCP field in the traffic Class octet. IP precedence is not defined for IPv6. This

is not an appropriate type of packet marking.

IPv6 ACL/DiffServ assignment is appropriate for LAG interfaces. The procedures described

by an ACL or DiffServ policy are equally applicable on a LAG interface.

Create and Configure an IPv6 DiffServ Class

To create and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

6. Enter a class name in the Class Name field.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing IPv6 class names, from which one can be

selected for modification or deletion.

7. From the Class Type menu, select the class type.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are

creating a new class. After the class is created, the Class Type field becomes

nonconfigurable.

8. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

Configure Quality of Service

236

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

9. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

10. Define the criteria that must be associated the IPv6 DiffServ class:

•Match Every. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

•Reference Class. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After selecting this option, the

classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to reference. A class

can reference at most one other class of the same type.

•Protocol T ype. Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

•Source Prefix/Length. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source prefix and

prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length. Prefix must

always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the hexadecimal range

from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can

be in the range from 0 to 128.

•Source L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to

65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

Configure Quality of Service

237

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•Destination Prefix/Length. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination

prefix and prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length.

Prefix must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the

hexadecimal range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and

the prefix length can be in the range from 0 to 128.

•Destination L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the

menu. The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed

ports.

•Flow Label. Select this radio button to require a packet’s flow label to match the

specified flow label. The flow label is a 20-bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet

and that is used by end stations to signify QoS handling in routers. The flow label can

be specified in the range from 0 to 1048575.

•IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. The menu includes Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the Class

Summary section.

Rename an Existing IPv6 DiffServ Class

To rename an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Table 63. IPv6 DiffServ class configuration class summary

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

Configure Quality of Service

238

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the class name.

7. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Criteria for an Existing IPv6 DiffServ Class

To change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

7. Change the class configuration as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Quality of Service

239

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Delete an IPv6 DiffServ Class

To delete an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the class name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure a DiffServ Policy

You can associate a collection of classes with one or more policies.

Create and Configure a DiffServ Policy

To create and configure a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

Configure Quality of Service

240

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

6. Enter a policy name in the Policy Name field.

You cannot specify the policy type. By default, the policy type is In, indicating that the

policy applies to ingress packets.

7. From the Member Class menu, optionally select an existing class that you want to

associate with the new policy.

8. Click the Add button.

The new policy is added.

9. After creating the policy, click the policy name.

The policy name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the policy attributes.

Configure Quality of Service

241

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

10. From the Assign Queue menu, select the queue to which packets of this policy class must

be assigned.

This is an integer value in the range 0 to 7.

11. Configure the policy attributes:

•Drop. Select this radio button to require each inbound packet to be dropped.

•Mark VLAN CoS. Select this radio button to specify the VLAN priority, which you must

select from the menu. The VLAN priority is expressed as an integer value in the range

from 0 to 7.

•Mark IP Precedence. Select this radio button to require packets to be marked with an

IP precedence value before being forwarded. You must select an IP precedence

value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

•Mirror. Select this radio button to require packets to be mirrored to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

•Redirect. Select this radio button to require packets to be redirected to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

•Mark IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require packet to be marked with an IP

DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP

value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

•Simple Policy. Select this radio button to define the traffic policing style for the class.

A simple policy uses a single data rate and burst size, resulting in one of two

outcomes: conform or violate. You must define the policy as described in the next

step.

12. If you select the Simple Policy radio button, you can specify the traffic policing style for the

class:

•Color Mode. From the menu, select one of the following options:

-Color Blind. This is the default selection. Color classes do not apply.

-Color Aware. Requires you to select a color class that is valid for use with this

policy instance. After you select Color Aware from the Color Mode menu, the

Color Conform Class menu displays. From this menu you must select a color

class that you already created (see Configure a DiffServ Class on page 228) and

selected as a member class for this policy instance (see Step 7).

Note: A valid color class contains a single, non-excluded match criterion for

the CoS, IP DSCP, or IP Precedence option. The configured option

must not conflict with the classifier of the policy instance itself.

•Committed Rate. Enter the committed rate that is applied to conforming packets by

specifying a value in the range from 1 to 4294967295 Kbps.

•Committed Burst Size. Enter the committed burst size that is applied to conforming

packets by specifying a value in the range from 1 to 128 Kbps.

13. Select the conforming and violating actions.

Configure Quality of Service

242

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The Conform Action section and Violate Action section list the actions to be taken on

conforming packets according to the policing metrics. By default, both conforming

packets and violating packets are sent.

In both the Conform Action section and the Violate Action section, select one of the

following actions:

•Send. Packets are forwarded unmodified. This is the default confirming action and the

default violating action.

•Drop. Packets are dropped.

•Mark CoS. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before being

forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field is set. You must select a

CoS value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

•Mark IP Precedence. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP

Precedence value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark IP

Precedence field is set. You must select an IP precedence value from 0 to 7 from the

menu.

•Mark IP DSCP. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value before

being forwarded. This selection requires that the DSCP field is set. You must select a

DSCP code from the menu. The menu includes Other as a selection, which lets you

enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order six

bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Rename an Existing DiffServ Policy

To rename an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

Table 64. DiffServ policy configuration policy attribute

Field Description

Policy Name The name of the DiffServ policy.

Policy Type The type of the policy, which is always inbound (In).

Member Class Name The name of the class instance within the policy.

Configure Quality of Service

243

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the policy name.

7. In the Policy Name field, specify the new name.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Policy Attributes for an Existing DiffServ Policy

To change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Click the policy name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the policy attributes displays.

7. Change the policy attributes as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Quality of Service

244

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Remove a Class From an Existing DiffServ Policy

To remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the policy name.

7. From the Member Class menu, select None.

8. Click the Apply button.

The class is removed from the policy.

Delete a DiffServ Policy

To delete a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Quality of Service

245

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the policy name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The policy is removed.

Configure the DiffServ Service Interface

You can activate a policy on an interface.

Attach a DiffServ Policy to an Interface

To attach a DiffServ policy to an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

6. To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

Configure Quality of Service

246

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Policy Name menu, select a policy name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Remove a DiffServ Policy From an Interface

To remove a DiffServ policy from an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check boxes that are associated with the interfaces from which you want to

remove the policy.

7. From the Policy In Name menu, select None.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Table 65. Service Interface Configuration information

Field Description

Direction Shows the traffic direction of this service interface (either In or Out).

Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface (either Up or Down).

Configure Quality of Service

247

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

View DiffServ Service Statistics

You can display service-level statistical information about all interfaces to which DiffServ

policies are attached.

To view the DiffServ service statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.

Table 66. DiffServ Service Statistics information

Field Description

Interface All valid port numbers on the switch with a DiffServ policy that is attached in the inbound

direction.

Direction The traffic direction of interface is inbound (In). This field shows only the direction for

which a DiffServ policy is attached.

Policy Name The name of the policy that is currently attached to the specified interface and direction.

Operational Status The operational status of the policy that is attached to the specified interface and

direction. The value is either Up or Down.

Configure Quality of Service

248

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Discarded Packets The total number of packets that are discarded for all class instances in this service policy

for any reason due to DiffServ treatment. This is the overall count per interface, per

direction. The discarded packets are supported in the inbound direction but not in the

outbound direction.

Member Classes All DiffServ classes that are defined as members of the selected policy name. Select a

member class name to display its statistics. If no class is associated with the selected

policy, then the list is empty.

Table 66. DiffServ Service Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

249

6. Manage Device Security

This chapter covers the following topics:

•Management Security Settings

•Configure Management Access

•Configure Port Authentication

•Set Up Traffic Control

•Configure Access Control Lists

Manage Device Security

250

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Management Security Settings

You can configure the login password, Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)

settings, Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS) settings, and

authentication lists.

Change the Password

You can change the login password.

To change the login password for the management interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

The Change Password page displays.

6. In the Old Password field, specify the current password for the account created by the user.

The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric

characters in length, and are case sensitive.

7. In the New Password field, specify the optional new or changed password for the account.

The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric

characters in length, and are case sensitive.

8. In the Confirm Password field, enter the password again to confirm that you entered it

correctly.

The entered password is displayed in dots.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage Device Security

251

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

Reset the Password to the Default Password

You can reset the password to the default password, which is password.

If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you change the

management mode back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal, all

Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last configuration saved on the cloud

server, including the switch password (that is, the password is reset to the Insight network

password).

If you changed the password through the local browser interface and you forget the password

and are unable to log in to switch, press the multifunctional Reset button on the front panel of

the switch for more than five seconds. The device reboots, and all switch settings, including

the password, are reset to the factory default values.

To reset the password to the default password:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

The Change Password page displays.

6. Select the Reset Password check box.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage Device Security

252

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

RADIUS Overview

RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks. The RADIUS server maintains a

user database, which contains per-user authentication information. The switch passes

information to the configured RADIUS server, which can authenticate a user name and

password before authorizing use of the network. RADIUS servers provide a centralized

authentication method for the following:

•Web access

•Access control port (802.1X)

Configure the Global RADIUS Server Settings

Use the Global Configuration page to add information about one or more RADIUS servers on

the network.

Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum retransmit

and RADIUS time-out values. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the maximum

retransmit period on each server runs out before the next server is attempted. A retransmit

does not occur until the configured time-out period on that server passes without a response

from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a response from the

RADIUS application equals the retransmit time x time-out period for all configured servers. If

the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are blocked

until the RADIUS application returns a response.

To configure the global RADIUS server settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 13.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Global Configuration.

The RADIUS Configuration page displays.

The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see Configure a

RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch on page 254). The switch supports up to

three RADIUS servers. If more than one RADIUS server is configured, the current server

Manage Device Security

253

Insight Managed 28-Port and 52-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switches

is the server configured as the primary server. If no servers are configured as the primary

server, the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.

6. In the Max Number of Retransmits field, specify the maximum number of times a request

packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.

The valid range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 4.

Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum

retransmit and RADIUS time-out values. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the

maximum retransmit period on each server runs out before the next server is attempted.

A retransmit does not occur until the configured time-out period on that server passes

without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving

a response from the RADIUS application equals the retransmit time x time-out period for

all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all

user interfaces are blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response.

7. In the Timeout Duration field, specify the time-out value, in seconds, for request

retransmissions.

The valid range is from 1 to 30. The default value is 5.